Tektronix MDO4000B Series Program Manual

page of 1158

/ 1158
Contents Table of Contents
Bookmarks

Quick Links

MDO4000C, MDO4000B, MDO4000, MSO4000B, DPO4000B

and MDO3000

Series Oscilloscopes

ZZZ

Programmer Manual

*P077051009*

077-0510-09

Table of Contents

Need help?

Do you have a question about the MDO4000B Series and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Tektronix MDO4000B Series

Page 1 MDO4000C, MDO4000B, MDO4000, MSO4000B, DPO4000B and MDO3000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual *P077051009* 077-0510-09...
Page 3 MDO4000C, MDO4000B, MDO4000, MSO4000B, DPO4000B and MDO3000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual MSO4000B, DPO4000B, MDO4000 and MDO4000B models should have ﬁrmware version 3.10 or above to use some of the commands listed in this document. MDO4000C models should have ﬁrmware version 1.02 and above. www.tek.com 077-0510-09...
Page 4 Copyright © Tektronix. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries or suppliers, and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supersedes that in all previously published material.
Page 5: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Getting Started Getting Started ....................New or Changed Functionality Updates that Impact the Programmatic Command Set ..... Setting Up Remote Communications Hardware ............Ethernet ....................USB....................... GPIB....................1-10 Setting Up Remote Communications Software ............1-11 Using VISA.................... 1-11 Using the LXI Web Page and e*Scope .............
Page 6: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Horizontal Command Group ................2-29 Mark Command Group..................2-30 Mask Command Group ................... 2-31 Math Command Group..................2-35 Measurement Command Group ................2-36 Miscellaneous Command Group ................. 2-38 PictBridge Command Group ................2-40 Power Command Group .................. 2-41 RF Command Group ..................
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Example 4: The Digital Collection with 8 Bytes Per Point and MagniVu Off....... Example 5: The Digital Collection with 4 Bytes Per Point and MagniVu On ..... D-10 Example 6: The Digital Collection with 8 Bytes Per Point and MagniVu On ..... D-12 Example 7: RF Frequency Domain Waveform............
Page 8: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 3-1: The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) ............ Figure 3-2: The Status Byte Register (SBR) ..............Figure 3-3: The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER) ........... Figure 3-4: The Event Status Enable Register (ESER) ............Figure 3-5: The Service Request Enable Register (SRER) ..........
Page 9: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents List of Tables Table 1-1: Updates to the MDO3000 and MDO4000C Series Oscilloscopes ......Table 1-2: Updates to the MDO3000 and MDO4000C Series Oscilloscopes ......Table 1-3: USB Device Parameters ................Table 2-1: Symbols for Backus-Naur Form ..............Table 2-2: Command Message Elements ..............
Page 10: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Table 2-36: Power Commands ................2-41 Table 2-37: RF Commands ..................2-52 Table 2-38: Save and Recall Commands ..............2-59 Table 2-39: Search Commands ................2-62 Table 2-40: Status and Error Commands ..............2-75 Table 2-41: Trigger Commands................2-80 Table 2-42: Vertical Commands ................
Page 11 Getting Started...
Page 13: Getting Started
Familiarity with the User Manual for your oscilloscope is assumed. You can download the User Manual from the Tektronix website at www.tektronix.com. NOTE. Most examples in this document assume that both...
Page 14: New Or Changed Functionality Updates That Impact The Programmatic Command Set
Getting Started Each of the new MDO4000C series models have the following options available: Option Description MDO4AFG Arbitrary Function Generator 16-channel digital acquisition MDO4MSO Option SA3 Spectrum analyzer input frequency 9 kHz - 3 GHz Spectrum analyzer input Option SA6 frequency 9 kHz - 6 GHz MDO4SEC Add password protected...
Page 15: Table 1-1: Updates To The Mdo3000 And Mdo4000C Series Oscilloscopes
Getting Started Table 1-1: Updates to the MDO3000 and MDO4000C Series Oscilloscopes Feature Use these commands Arbitrary Function Generator functionality (MDO4000C series AFG:AMPLitude only) AFG:FREQuency AFG:FUNCtion AFG:HIGHLevel AFG:LEVELPreset AFG:LOWLevel AFG:NOISEAdd:PERCent AFG:NOISEAdd:STATE AFG:OFFSet AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance AFG:OUTPut:STATE AFG:PERIod AFG:PHASe AFG:PULse:WIDth AFG:RAMP:SYMmetry AFG:SQUare:DUty Arbitrary Waveform Generator functionality (MDO3000 and AFG:ARBitrary:ARB<x>:DATE? MDO4000C series only) AFG:ARBitrary:ARB<x>:LABel...
Page 16 Getting Started Table 1-1: Updates to the MDO3000 and MDO4000C Series Oscilloscopes (cont.) Feature Use these commands ARINC429 search criteria SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A: CONDition SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA: HIVALue SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA: QUALiﬁer SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA: VALue SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A: ERRTYPE SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel: HIVALue SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel: QUALiﬁer SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel: VALue SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SDI SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SSM ARINC429 trigger criteria TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:CONDition TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA:HIVALue TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA:QUALiﬁer...
Page 17 Getting Started Table 1-1: Updates to the MDO3000 and MDO4000C Series Oscilloscopes (cont.) Feature Use these commands Digital Voltmeter functionality (MDO3000 and MDO4000C series only) DVM:AUTORange DVM:DISPLAYSTYle DVM:MEASUrement:FREQuency? DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:AVErage? DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:MAXimum? DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:MINImum? DVM:MEASUrement:INFMAXimum? DVM:MEASUrement:INFMINimum? DVM:MEASUrement:VALue? DVM:MODe DVM:SOUrce Act on Event functionality ACTONEVent:ACTION:AUXOUT:STATE Available actions: ACTONEVent:ACTION:PRINT:STATE...
Page 18 Getting Started Table 1-1: Updates to the MDO3000 and MDO4000C Series Oscilloscopes (cont.) Feature Use these commands Video Picture functionality (standard on MDO3000). Requires VIDPic:AUTOContrast the DPO4VID application module for use with MSO/DPO4000B VIDPic:AUTOContrast:UPDATERate and MDO4000/B/C models) VIDPic:BRIGHTNess VIDPic:CONTRast VIDPic:DISplay VIDPic:FRAMETYPe VIDPic:LOCation:HEIght VIDPic:LOCation:OFFSet...
Page 19: Setting Up Remote Communications Hardware
Getting Started Table 1-1: Updates to the MDO3000 and MDO4000C Series Oscilloscopes (cont.) Feature Use these commands Additional RF Spectrogram and Spectrum Trace commands RF:SPECTRogram RF:SPECTRogram:SLICETIMe? RF:SPECTRogram:TIMe? RF:SPECTRUMTrace Ability to save RF baseband I & Q data to a Matlab level 5 SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat:RF_BB_IQ ﬁle or .TIQ ﬁle Table 1-2: Updates to the MDO3000 and MDO4000C Series Oscilloscopes...
Page 20 Getting Started To change the Ethernet settings on your oscilloscope, do the following: 1. On the front panel, push Utility. 2. Push Utility Page. 3. Select I/O with the Multipurpose knob. 4. Push Network Conﬁguration. 5. On the side menu, if you are on a DHCP Ethernet network and using a through cable, push Automatic (DHCP &...
Page 21: Table 1-3: Usb Device Parameters
MSO4014B 0x0428 (decimal 1064) MDO4014-3 0x042a (decimal 1066) MDO4034-3 0x042e (decimal 1070) MDO3000 (all) 0x408 (decimal 1032) MDO4000C (all) 0x0456 (decimal 1110) Serial number Serial number Manufacturer description “Tektronix” Interface description “USBTMC-USB488” MDO4000/B/C, MSO/DPO4000B and MDO3000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual...
Page 22: Gpib
Getting Started GPIB To use GPIB (General Purpose Interface Bus), start by connecting an appropriate USB cable to the USB 2.0 high-speed (HS) device port on the rear panel of your oscilloscope. Connect the other end to the TEK-USB-488 Adapter host port. Then connect a GPIB cable from the TEK-USB-488 Adapter to your PC.
Page 23: Setting Up Remote Communications Software
VISA lets you use your MS-Windows computer to acquire data from your oscilloscope for use in an analysis package that runs on your PC, such as Microsoft Excel, National Instruments LabVIEW, Tektronix OpenChoice Desktop software, or your own custom software. You can use a common communications connection, such as USB, Ethernet, or GPIB, to connect the computer to the oscilloscope.
Page 24 These include toolbars that speed connectivity with Microsoft Excel and Word. There are also two standalone acquisition programs called NI LabVIEW SignalExpress™, Tektronix Edition and Tektronix OpenChoice Desktop. The rear-panel USB 2.0 high-speed (HS) device port is the correct USB port for computer connectivity.
Page 25: Using The Lxi Web Page And E*Scope
Getting Started Using the LXI Web Page With e*Scope, you can access any Internet-connected MSO/DPO4000B, MDO4000/B/C or MDO3000 Series oscilloscope from a web browser. To set up and e*Scope e*Scope communications between your oscilloscope and a Web browser running on a remote computer: 1.
Page 26 Getting Started To set up and use a socket server between your oscilloscope and a remote terminal or computer: 1. Connect the oscilloscope to your computer network with an appropriate Ethernet cable. 2. Push Utility. 3. Push Utility Page. 4. Turn multipurpose knob a and select I/O. 5.
Page 27: Documentation
Do not use the computer’s backspace key during an MS Windows' Telnet session with the oscilloscope. Socket Server Terminal Protocol Mode Commands. Following are Tektronix Instrument Control Terminal Session Control commands: !t <timeout> : set the response timeout in milliseconds.
Page 28 Getting Started with OpenChoice ™ Solutions Manual. Options for getting data from your oscilloscope into any one of several available analysis tools. TekVISA Programmer Manual. Description of TekVISA, the Tektronix implementation of the VISA Application Programming Interface (API). TekVISA is industry-compliant software for writing interoperable oscilloscope drivers in a variety of Application Development Environments (ADEs).
Page 29 Syntax and Commands...
Page 31: Command Syntax
Command Syntax You can control the operations and functions of the oscilloscope through the Ethernet port or the USB 2.0 high-speed (HS) device port using commands and queries. The related topics listed below describe the syntax of these commands and queries. The topics also describe the conventions that the oscilloscope uses to process them.
Page 32: Table 2-2: Command Message Elements
Command Syntax Table 2-2: Command Message Elements Symbol Meaning <Header> This is the basic command name. If the header ends with a question mark, the command is a query. The header may begin with a colon (:) character. If the command is concatenated with other commands, the beginning colon is required.
Page 33: Clearing The Oscilloscope
Command Syntax Queries Queries cause the oscilloscope to return status or setting information. Queries have the structure: [:]<Header> [:]<Header>[<Space><Argument> [<Comma><Argument>]...] You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless otherwise noted. These branch queries return information about all the mnemonics below the speciﬁed branch or level.
Page 34 Command Syntax Abbreviating You can abbreviate many oscilloscope commands. Each command in this documentation shows the minimum acceptable abbreviations in capitals. For example, you can enter the command simply as ACQ:NUMA ACQuire:NUMAvg or acq:numa. Abbreviation rules may change over time as new oscilloscope models are introduced.
Page 35: Constructed Mnemonics
Command Syntax If the header is off: FULL;1 1. Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same message. For example, ACQuire:MODe SAMple;NUMAVg?;STATE? is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to sample. The message then queries the number of acquisitions for averaging and the acquisition state. Concatenated commands and queries are executed in the order received.
Page 36: Table 2-5: Channel Mnemonics
Command Syntax Cursor Position When cursors are displayed, commands may specify which cursor of the pair to use. Mnemonics Table 2-5: Channel Mnemonics Symbol Meaning CH<x> A channel speciﬁer; <x> is 1 through 4. Table 2-6: Cursor Mnemonics Symbol Meaning CURSOR<x>...
Page 37: Argument Types
Command Syntax Argument Types Commands use arguments such as enumeration, numeric, quoted string and block. Each of these arguments are listed in detail below. Enumeration Enter these arguments as unquoted text words. Like key words, enumeration arguments follow the same convention where the portion indicated in uppercase is required and that in lowercase is optional.
Page 38: Table 2-12: Block Argument
Command Syntax A quoted string can include any character deﬁned in the 7-bit ASCII character set. Follow these rules when you use quoted strings: 1. Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string. For example: "this is a valid string"...
Page 39 Command Syntax MDO4000/B/C, MSO/DPO4000B and MDO3000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual...
Page 40 Command Syntax 2-10 MDO4000/B/C, MSO/DPO4000B and MDO3000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual...
Page 41: Command Groups
Command Groups This manual lists the MDO4000C, MDO4000B, MDO4000, MSO4000B, DPO4000B and MDO3000 Series IEEE488.2 commands in two ways. First, it presents them by functional groups. Then, it lists them alphabetically. The functional group list starts below. The alphabetical list provides detail on each command.
Page 42: Act On Event Command Group
Command Groups Act on Event Command Group Use the Act on Event commands to Act once a certain type of Event has happened. Available actions: - Stop acquisitions - Save waveform data to a ﬁle - Save a screen image to a ﬁle - Send a screen image to a printer - Send a pulse to the Aux Out port - Generate a service request...
Page 43: Afg Command Group
Command Groups AFG Command Group Use the AFG commands for Arbitrary Function Generator functionality. MDO3000 series with option MDO3AFG installed and MDO4000C series with option MDO4AFG installed only. The AFG functionality is available when either the time domain acquisition or RF acquisition is active.
Page 44: Arb Command Group
Command Groups the alias name must consist of a valid IEEE488.2 message unit, which may not appear in a message preceded by a colon, comma, or a command or query program header. the alias name may not appear in a message followed by a colon, comma, or question mark.
Page 45: Bus Command Group
Command Groups Bus Command Group Use the Bus commands when working with serial or parallel bus measurements. Bus commands let you specify the bus number: (B1-B4), except for MDO3000, which has only two buses (B1-B2). B1 – B4 for MSO/DPO/MDO4000/B models B1 –...
Page 46: Table 2-18: Bus Commands
Command Groups Table 2-18: Bus Commands Commands Description BUS? Returns the parameters for each serial (if installed) and parallel bus. BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate This command speciﬁes the bit rate for the ARINC429 bus. BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA: This command speciﬁes the size of the DATA ﬁeld in an ARINC429 packet. FORMAT BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:POLarity This command sets the ARINC429 bus polarity to normal or inverted.
Page 47 Command Groups Table 2-18: Bus Commands (cont.) Commands Description BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce: This command speciﬁes the Ethernet data source for D- input for single-ended probing. DMINus BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce: This command speciﬁes the Ethernet data source for the D+ input for single-ended probing. DPLUs BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TYPe This command speciﬁes the Ethernet standard type: 10Base-T or 100Base-T.
Page 48 Command Groups Table 2-18: Bus Commands (cont.) Commands Description BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity This command speciﬁes parity for the RS-232 bus BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity This command speciﬁes the polarity for the RS-232C bus BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:SOUrce This command speciﬁes the RX source waveform for the RS-232 bus. BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:SOUrce This command speciﬁes the TX source waveform for the RS-232 bus.
Page 49: Calibration And Diagnostic Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-18: Bus Commands (cont.) Commands Description BUS:UPPerthreshold{:MATH|: This command speciﬁes the upper threshold for the math waveform. MATH1} BUS:UPPerthreshold:REF<x> This command sets the upper threshold for each reference waveform. Calibration and Diagnostic Command Group The Calibration and Diagnostic commands provide information about the current state of oscilloscope calibration.
Page 50: Conﬁguration Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-19: Calibration and Diagnostic Commands (cont.) Command Description CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:SCOPE? This query returns the factory calibration status for the oscilloscope (doesn't include RF or AFG) of the instrument. CALibrate:RESults:SPC? Returns the results of the last SPC operation. CALibrate:RESults:SPC:RF? This query returns the status of the last SPC run for the RF portion of the instrument (doesn't include analog channels) .
Page 51 Command Groups Table 2-20: Conﬁguration Commands (cont.) Command Description CONFIGuration:ANALOg:GNDCPLG? This query returns a boolean value to indicate whether the instrument supports the ground coupling feature for analog channels. As this feature is not supported on MSO/DPO4000B or MDO4000/B/C models, this query always returns 0. CONFIGuration:ANALOg:MAXBANDWidth? Returns the maximum bandwidth for analog channels.
Page 52 Command Groups Table 2-20: Conﬁguration Commands (cont.) Command Description CONFIGuration:BUSWAVEFORMS:LIN? This query returns a boolean value to indicate whether the optional LIN bus triggering and analysis feature is present. CONFIGuration:BUSWAVEFORMS:MIL1553B? This query returns a boolean value to indicate whether the optional MIL-STD-1553 bus triggering and analysis feature is present.
Page 53: Cursor Command Group
Command Groups Cursor Command Group Use the commands in the Cursor Command Group to control the cursor display and readout. You can use these commands to control the setups for cursor 1 and cursor 2, such as cursor position. You can also use the commands to select one of the following cursor functions: Off.
Page 54: Display Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-21: Cursor Commands (cont.) Command Description CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:DELta? Returns the XY cursor polar coordinate delta CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA: Returns the cursor X or cursor Y polar coordinate POSITION<x>? CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:UNIts? Returns the cursor polar coordinate units CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:DELta? Returns the difference between the cursors X position and cursor Y position CURSor:XY:PRODUCT: Returns the position of the X or Y cursor used to calculate the X ×...
Page 55: Dvm Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-22: Display Commands (cont.) Command Description DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight: Sets or returns the state of the display auto-dim feature. The default is enabled. AUTODim:ENAble DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight: Sets or returns the amount of time, in minutes, to wait for no UI activity before automatically AUTODim:TIMe dimming the display.
Page 56: Email Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-23: DVM Commands (cont.) Command Description DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory: Returns the minimum readout value for the DVM function over the history period. MINImum? DVM:MEASUrement:INFMAXimum? Returns the maximum DVM readout value over the entire time that the DVM has been on since the last change using the DVM:MODe DVM:SOUrce...
Page 57: File System Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-25: Ethernet Commands Command Description ETHERnet:DHCPbootp This command speciﬁes the network initialization search for a DHCP/BOOTP server ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress This command speciﬁes the network Domain Name Server (Dns) IP address ETHERnet:DOMAINname This command speciﬁes the network domain name ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress? Returns the Ethernet address value assigned to the oscilloscope ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress...
Page 58: Hard Copy Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-26: File System Commands Command Description FILESystem? Returns the ﬁle system state FILESystem:COPy This command copies a named ﬁle to a new ﬁle. FILESystem:CWD This command speciﬁes the current working directory for FILESystem commands FILESystem:DELEte Deletes a named ﬁle or directory FILESystem:DIR? Returns a list of directory contents Formats a named drive...
Page 59: Histogram Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-27: Hard Copy Commands (cont.) Command Description HARDCopy:PRINTer:LIST? Displays the list of currently deﬁned printers. HARDCopy:PRINTer:REName Renames a network or email printer on the list of available printers, replacing the currently stored settings with the settings speciﬁed in the command. Histogram Command Group Use the commands in the Histogram Command Group to set up a histogram for measurements.
Page 60: Mark Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-29: Horizontal Commands (cont.) Command Description HORizontal:DIGital:SAMPLERate: Returns the sample rate of the Magnivu digital acquisition MAGnivu? HORizontal:DIGital:SAMPLERate: Returns the sample rate of the main digital acquisition MAIn? HORizontal:POSition This command speciﬁes the horizontal position, in percent, that is used when delay is off HORizontal:PREViewstate? Returns the display system preview state HORizontal:RECOrdlength...
Page 61: Mask Command Group
NOTE. In order to use Mask commands, you need to install an optional Limit and mask test application module, Tektronix part number DPO4LMT. Also, ≥350 MHz bandwidth models are recommended for telecommunication standards >55 Mb/s. NOTE.
Page 62: Table 2-31: Mask Commands
Command Groups number of waveforms or by time, or specify a violation threshold that must be met before considering a test a failure, or specify an action (such as writing to a ﬁle or sending an SRQ) that is to be performed upon a violation, a test failure, or test completion.
Page 63 Command Groups Table 2-31: Mask commands (cont.) Command Description MASK:TESt:AUXout:COMPLetion Causes the instrument to send a TTL signal to the AUX:out port whenever a pass/fail mask test completes. MASK:TESt:AUXout:FAILure Causes the instrument to send a TTL signal to the AUX:out port whenever a pass/fail mask test fails.
Page 64 Command Groups Table 2-31: Mask commands (cont.) Command Description MASK:USER:TRIGTOSAMP Speciﬁes the nominal time, in seconds, from the (leading edge) trigger position to the pulse bit sampling position, to be used for testing with a user-deﬁned custom mask. MASK:USER:VOFFSet Speciﬁes the nominal value, in volts, to be used to vertically offset the input channels for a user-deﬁned custom mask.
Page 65: Math Command Group
Command Groups Math Command Group Use the commands in the Math Command Group to create and deﬁne a math waveform. First, specify the math type using MATH[1]:TYPe – either dual waveform, FFT, advanced math, or spectrum math. Then, using the MATH[1]:DEFine command, you can build simple math expressions that contain no computation, such as...
Page 66: Measurement Command Group
Command Groups Measurement Command Group Use the commands in the Measurement Command Group to control the automated measurement system. Up to eight automated measurements can be displayed on the screen. In the commands, these measurement readouts are named MEAS<x>, where <x> is the measurement number.
Page 67 Command Groups Table 2-33: Measurement Commands (cont.) Command Description MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay? Returns information about the immediate delay measurement MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay: This command speciﬁes the search direction to use for immediate delay measurements DIRection MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay: This command speciﬁes the slope of the edge used for immediate delay “from” and “to” EDGE<x>...
Page 68: Miscellaneous Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-33: Measurement Commands (cont.) Command Description MEASUrement:METHod This command speciﬁes the method used for calculating reference levels MEASUrement:REFLevel? Returns the current reference level parameters MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute: This command speciﬁes the top reference level for rise time HIGH MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute: This command speciﬁes the low reference level for rise time MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute: This command speciﬁes the mid reference level for the speciﬁed channel in absolute volts...
Page 69 However, it does not include the instrument serial number. *IDN? Returns the same information as the ID? command except the data is formatted according to Tektronix Codes & Formats LANGuage This command speciﬁes the user interface display language LOCk This command speciﬁes the front panel lock state...
Page 70: Pictbridge Command Group
This query returns the vendor ID number as a decimal. USBTMC:VENDORID:HEXadecimal? This query returns the vendor ID number as a hexadecimal value. The hexadecimal vendor ID for Tektronix instruments is 0x699. VERBose This command speciﬁes the verbose state PictBridge Command Group Use the commands in the PictBridge Command Group to store printer settings.
Page 71: Power Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-35: PictBridge Commands (cont.) Command Description PICTBridge:PAPERSize Sets the output print paper size PICTBridge:PAPERType This command speciﬁes the paper type PICTBridge:PRINTQual This command speciﬁes the output print quality USBDevice:CONFigure Enables or disables the rear USB port for use with Pictbridge printers Power Command Group Use the commands in the Power Command Group for power analysis.
Page 72 Command Groups Table 2-36: Power Commands (cont.) Command Description POWer:HARMonics:FREQRef: This command speciﬁes the ﬁxed reference frequency value for harmonics measurements FIXEDFREQValue POWer:HARMonics:IEC:CLAss This command speciﬁes the ﬁltering class for IEC harmonics POWer:HARMonics:IEC:FILter This command speciﬁes the enabled state for ﬁltering of IEC harmonics POWer:HARMonics:IEC: This command speciﬁes the fundamental current for IEC harmonics FUNDamental...
Page 73 Command Groups Table 2-36: Power Commands (cont.) Command Description POWer:HARMonics:RESults: Returns PASS, FAIL or NA. Speciﬁes if the IEC Class A higher harmonic limit (and HAR<1-400>:TEST:IEC: conditions) are met CLASSALIMit? POWer:HARMonics:RESults: Returns PASS, FAIL or NA. Speciﬁes if the Normal IEC harmonic limits are met HAR<1-400>:TEST:IEC:NORMAL? POWer:HARMonics:RESults: Returns PASS, FAIL or NA.
Page 74 Command Groups Table 2-36: Power Commands (cont.) Command Description POWer:QUALity:DISplay: This command speciﬁes the display state for the current crest factor readout ICRESTfactor POWer:QUALity:DISplay:IRMS This command speciﬁes the display state for the rms current (IRMS) readout POWer:QUALity:DISplay: This command speciﬁes the display state for the phase angle readout PHASEangle POWer:QUALity:DISplay: This command speciﬁes the display state for the power factor readout...
Page 75 Command Groups Table 2-36: Power Commands (cont.) Command Description POWer:SOA:LINear:XMAX This command speciﬁes the user XMAX value for use in linear SOA calculations POWer:SOA:LINear:XMIN This command speciﬁes the user XMIN value for use in linear SOA calculations POWer:SOA:LINear:YMAX This command speciﬁes the user YMAX value for use in linear SOA calculations POWer:SOA:LINear:YMIN This command speciﬁes the user YMIN value for use in linear SOA calculations POWer:SOA:LOG:XMAX...
Page 76 Command Groups Table 2-36: Power Commands (cont.) Command Description POWer:SWLoss:GATe:TURNON This command speciﬁes the gate turn on level for switching loss power measurements POWer:SWLoss:NUMCYCles? Returns the number of cycles counted for the switching loss calculation POWer:SWLoss:RDSon This command speciﬁes RDSON value for use in switching loss calculations when the conduction calculation method is RDSON POWer:SWLoss:REFLevel: This command speciﬁes the mid voltage reference level used in switching loss power...
Page 77: Rf Command Group
This command speciﬁes the voltage source for the power application RF Command Group The Tektronix MDO4000/B Series Oscilloscope models, MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6, and MDO3000 models have a built-in RF input, in addition to analog and digital channels, which allows you to display, measure, perform math on and analyze both time and frequency domain signals with one instrument.
Page 78 Command Groups 4. RF Average trace: Data from the RF Normal trace is averaged over multiple acquisitions. This is true power averaging, which occurs before the log conversion. Each power of 2 average reduces the displayed noise by 3 dB. Time Domain Trace Types The MDO4000/B/C offers three additional time domain trace types in addition to the usual analog and digital waveforms one expects on an oscilloscope.
Page 79 Command Groups attenuation, ﬁltering and down-conversion, depending on the parameters set by the user (frequency, span, reference level, and so forth.) For the MDO4000/B/C series models, the acquisition system uses one of three frequency bands to acquire RF data depending on where the center frequency and span are set.
Page 80 Command Groups Spectrogram slices are generated by taking each spectrum and ﬂipping it on its edge, so that it is one pixel row tall. Each new acquisition adds another slice at the bottom of the spectrogram, and the previous acquisitions (slices) move up one row;...
Page 81 RF traces can be saved to an .ISF or .CSV ﬁle for subsequent recall to any of the 4 internal reference memory locations. The oscilloscope can also save, but not recall, RF acquisitions as .TIQ ﬁles. You can import .TIQ ﬁles into Tektronix SignalVu-PC software (PC based), SignalVu software (oscilloscope based), RSAVu software (PC based) or into a Tektronix real-time spectrum analyzer for pulse analysis and demodulation analysis.
Page 82: Table 2-37: Rf Commands
Command Groups Table 2-37: RF Commands Item Description MARKER:M<x>:AMPLitude: This query returns the actual amplitude (vertical) value of the either of the two manual markers ABSolute? that are available for frequency domain traces, in dBm. MARKER:M<x>:AMPLitude: This query returns the delta amplitude (vertical) value of either of the two manual markers that DELTa? are available for frequency domain traces, in relation to the Reference Marker.
Page 83 Command Groups Table 2-37: RF Commands (cont.) Item Description RF:DETECTionmethod: This command speciﬁes the detection method the oscilloscope should use when creating an RF_AVErage RF Average trace in the frequency domain. The Average trace displays the average of values from multiple acquisitions at each trace point. RF:DETECTionmethod: This command speciﬁes the detection method the oscilloscope should use when creating an RF_MAXHold...
Page 84 Command Groups Table 2-37: RF Commands (cont.) Item Description This query measures a ratio between the third lower side channel and the Main channel when RF:MEASUre:ACPR:LA3DB? performing ACPR measurements using a frequency domain trace. The power in the adjacent channel is equivalent to the power in the main channel (dBm) added to the power ratio (dB) of the adjacent channel.
Page 85 Command Groups Table 2-37: RF Commands (cont.) Item Description RF:POSition This command speciﬁes the vertical position for the frequency domain traces. The vertical position is the location of the Reference Level with respect to the top of the graticule, in divisions.
Page 86 Command Groups Table 2-37: RF Commands (cont.) Item Description RF:RF_AMPlitude:VERTical: This command speciﬁes the vertical scale for the RF Amplitude vs. Time trace. For a signal SCAle with constant amplitude, increasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller. Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger.
Page 87 Command Groups Table 2-37: RF Commands (cont.) Item Description RF:SPECTRogram:NUMSLICEs? This query returns the number of spectrogram slices that are currently being rendered. A spectrogram slice is a section of the spectrogram representing one interval, or slice, of time in the spectrogram record. RF:SPECTRogram:SLICESELect This command speciﬁes the spectrogram slice number that is to be displayed.
Page 88: Save And Recall Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-37: RF Commands (cont.) Item Description SEARCH:SPECTral:LIST? This query will return a list of all automatically placed peak markers displayed in the frequency domain graticule. (To return information about manual markers, use the MARKER:M<x> commands.) SELect:RF_AMPlitude This command switches the RF Amplitude vs. Time trace display on or off in the time domain graticule.
Page 89: Table 2-38: Save And Recall Commands
The oscilloscope can save, but not recall, RF acquisitions as .TIQ ﬁles. You can import .TIQ ﬁles into Tektronix SignalVu-PC software (PC based), SignalVu software (oscilloscope based), RSAVu software (PC based) or into a Tektronix real-time spectrum analyzer for pulse analysis and demodulation analysis.
Page 90 Command Groups Table 2-38: Save and Recall Commands (cont.) Command Description SAVe:WAVEform:GATIng Speciﬁes whether save waveform operations should save the entire waveform or a speciﬁed portion of the waveform SETUP<x>:DATE? Returns the date when the speciﬁed oscilloscope setup was saved SETUP<x>:LABEL This command speciﬁes the speciﬁed oscilloscope setup label SETUP<x>:TIME?
Page 91: Search Command Group
Command Groups Search Command Group The search commands let you analyze your source waveform record for conditions speciﬁed by a search’s criteria. Once these criteria are matched, the oscilloscope places a search mark at that location in the waveform record. You can then navigate or save the marks.
Page 92: Table 2-39: Search Commands
Command Groups Bus, Video, and RF A table is available that lists all commands enabled by each application module (See page H-1, List of Beta Commands and Features.) application modules For I C or SPI bus signals, install the DPO4EMBD application module, except for MDO3000 models, which require MDO3EMBD.
Page 93 Command Groups Table 2-39: Search Commands (cont.) Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A: This command sets the condition to use when searching on CONDition ARINC429 bus data (word start, label, matching data, word end, or error). SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A: This command speciﬁes the high value to use when searching on DATA:HIVALue the ARINC429 bus data ﬁeld.
Page 94 Command Groups Table 2-39: Search Commands (cont.) Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa: This command sets the qualiﬁer (<, >, =, not =, <=) to be used to QUALiﬁer search on CAN bus data. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa: This command sets the length of the data string, in bytes, to be SIZe used to search on CAN bus data.
Page 95 Command Groups Table 2-39: Search Commands (cont.) Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIG:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHER:MAC: When the Ethernet search condition is set to , this MACADDress ADDR:DEST:VAL command speciﬁes the 48–bit MAC destination address value that is to be used in the search (along with the source address value). SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIG:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHER:MAC: When the Ethernet search condition is set to , this...
Page 96 Command Groups Table 2-39: Search Commands (cont.) Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: This command speciﬁes the high value to use when searching on DATa:HIVALue the FlexRay bus data ﬁeld. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: This command speciﬁes the offset of the data string in bytes to be DATa:OFFSet used when searching on the FlexRay bus data ﬁeld.
Page 97 Command Groups Table 2-39: Search Commands (cont.) Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe This command speciﬁes the length of the data string in bytes to be used for I2C search SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa: This command speciﬁes the binary data string to be used for I2C VALue search SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition...
Page 98 Command Groups Table 2-39: Search Commands (cont.) Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: When the MIL-STD-1553 bus search condition is set to , this DATa DATa:PARity command speciﬁes the data parity bit to be used in the search. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: When the MIL-STD-1553 bus search condition is set to , this DATa DATa:VALue...
Page 99 Command Groups Table 2-39: Search Commands (cont.) Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: When the MIL-STD-1553 bus search condition is set to STATus STATus:PARity this command speciﬁes the status parity bit value to be used in the search. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B: When the MIL-STD-1553 bus search condition is set to , this TIMe TIMe:LESSLimit...
Page 100 Command Groups Table 2-39: Search Commands (cont.) Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa: This command speciﬁes the number of data bytes for USB searches SIZe SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa: This command speciﬁes the data type for USB searches TYPe SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa: This command speciﬁes the data value for USB data searches VALue SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB: This command speciﬁes the endpoint value for USB searches...
Page 101 Command Groups Table 2-39: Search Commands (cont.) Command Description Sets the threshold level to use when searching on the math SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:MATH waveform. Sets the threshold level to use when searching on a reference SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:REF<x> waveform. Sets the threshold level to use when searching on the RF Amplitude SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:RF_AMPlitude vs.
Page 102 Command Groups Table 2-39: Search Commands (cont.) Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn: This command speciﬁes the maximum time that the selected pattern LESSLimit may be true. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn: This command speciﬁes the minimum time that the selected pattern MORELimit may be true. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> This command speciﬁes the channel threshold level for a logic search.
Page 103 Command Groups Table 2-39: Search Commands (cont.) Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold: This command speciﬁes the threshold for RF Frequency vs. RF_FREQuency Time trace searches. For runt and transition searches, this level is the lower threshold. For other search types, this is the single threshold.
Page 104 Command Groups Table 2-39: Search Commands (cont.) Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk: This command speciﬁes the clock threshold setting for an setup/hold THReshold search SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce This command speciﬁes the data source setting for an setup/hold search SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa: This command speciﬁes the data threshold setting for an setup/hold THReshold search SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime...
Page 105: Status And Error Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-39: Search Commands (cont.) Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold: For a runt or transition search using the RF Frequency vs. Time RF_FREQuency trace, this command speciﬁes the upper threshold to be used by the search engine. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold: This command speciﬁes the upper threshold to be used by the RF_PHASe search engine when performing a runt or transition search using the RF Phase vs.
Page 106: Trigger Command Group
Command Groups Trigger Command Group Use the commands in the Trigger Command Group to control all aspects of triggering the oscilloscope. You can perform edge, pulse width, logic, video, runt, timeout, transition (rise/fall time), setup & hold and bus triggering using the A trigger.
Page 107 Command Groups To set up a logic trigger, ﬁrst set the trigger type to using the command LOGIc TRIGger:A:TYPe, and then use the command TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss select LOGIC You can perform logic triggering using a clock (by setting TRIGger:A:LOGIc: INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce to one of the channels), so that the oscilloscope triggers when the speciﬁed logical combination of data channels is true during a transition on the clock channel.
Page 108 Command Groups To set up a runt trigger, ﬁrst set the trigger type to using the PULSe command TRIGger:A:TYPe. Then select using the command RUNt TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss. Then use TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth, TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn, TRIGger:A: UPPerthreshold:CH<x> and related commands. You can set the threshold voltage levels using TRIGger:A:LEVel:AUXin, TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>, or TRIGger:A:LEVel:D<x>.
Page 109 Command Groups To set up a video trigger, set the A trigger type to using the VIDeo command TRIGger:A:TYPe. Then use TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard,TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom{:FORMat|:TYPe}, and related commands. Sequence Trigger Sequence triggering occurs when both the A and B triggers are used in edge triggering.
Page 110: Table 2-41: Trigger Commands
Command Groups Bus, Video and RF A table is available that lists all commands enabled by each application module (See page H-1, List of Beta Commands and Features.) application modules C or SPI bus signals, install the DPO4EMBD application module, For I except for MDO3000 models, which require MDO3EMBD.
Page 111 Command Groups Table 2-41: Trigger Commands (cont.) Command Description TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA: This command sets the qualiﬁer (<, >, =, <=, >=, not =, in range, out of range) QUALiﬁer to use when triggering on a ARINC429 bus data ﬁeld. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA:VALue This command speciﬁes the low value to use when triggering on a ARINC429 bus data ﬁeld.
Page 112 Command Groups Table 2-41: Trigger Commands (cont.) Command Description TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BRSBIT This command sets the value (don’t care, 1, or 0) to be used to trigger on CAN FD BRS bits TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBIT This command sets the value (don’t care, 1, or 0) to be used to trigger on CAN FD ESI bits TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype This command sets the frame type (data, remote, error or overload) to be used...
Page 113 Command Groups Table 2-41: Trigger Commands (cont.) Command Description TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC{:LENgth|: When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to , and the qualiﬁer is MACLENgth TYPe}:VALue set to LESSthan, MOREthan, EQual, UNEQual, LESSEQual this command speciﬁes the 16–bit value to trigger on. MOREEQual, TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QTAG:VALue When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to...
Page 114 Command Groups Table 2-41: Trigger Commands (cont.) Command Description TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:EOFTYPE This command speciﬁes the end of ﬁle type (static, dynamic or any) when triggering on the FlexRay bus EOF ﬁeld. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:ERRTYPE This command speciﬁes the error type when triggering on the FlexRay bus signal.
Page 115 Command Groups Table 2-41: Trigger Commands (cont.) Command Description TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND: When the MIL-STD-1553 bus trigger condition is set to , and the COMMAND ADDRess:HIVALue qualiﬁer is set to , this command speciﬁes the upper INrange OUTrange limit of the range for the remote terminal address ﬁeld. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND: When the MIL-STD-1553 bus trigger condition is set to , this...
Page 116 Command Groups Table 2-41: Trigger Commands (cont.) Command Description TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT: When the MIL-STD-1553 bus trigger condition is set to , this command STATus DBCA speciﬁes the status word dynamic bus control acceptance (DBCA) bit value (bit 18) to be used in the trigger. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT: When the MIL-STD-1553 bus trigger condition is set to , this...
Page 117 Command Groups Table 2-41: Trigger Commands (cont.) Command Description TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe This command speciﬁes the length of the data string in bytes to be used for SPI trigger TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:HIVALue This command speciﬁes the high limit for the USB trigger address TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:VALue This command speciﬁes the value for the USB trigger address TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition This command speciﬁes the USB trigger condition...
Page 118 Command Groups Table 2-41: Trigger Commands (cont.) Command Description TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x> Sets the threshold voltage level for an Edge, Pulse Width, Runt or Rise/Fall (aka Transition, aka Slew Rate) trigger to use when triggering on an analog channel waveform. TRIGger:A:LEVel:D<x> Sets the threshold voltage level for an Edge, Pulse Width, Runt or Rise/Fall (aka Transition, aka Slew Rate) trigger to use when triggering on a digital channel waveform.
Page 119 Command Groups Table 2-41: Trigger Commands (cont.) Command Description TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit This command speciﬁes the lower limit to use, in seconds, when triggering on detection of a pulse whose duration is inside or outside a range of two values. (Use TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit to specify the upper limit of the range.) TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity...
Page 120 Command Groups Table 2-41: Trigger Commands (cont.) Command Description TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe When triggering using the trigger type, this command speciﬁes the TIMEOut timeout time, in seconds. The default and minimum is 4.0E-9 seconds and the maximum is 8.0 seconds. The resolution is 800.0E-12 which means that the increments of time speciﬁed is 800 picoseconds.
Page 121: Vertical Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-41: Trigger Commands (cont.) Command Description TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe This command speciﬁes the B edge trigger slope TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce This command speciﬁes the B edge trigger source Returns the current B trigger events parameter TRIGger:B:EVENTS? TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt This command speciﬁes the number of events that must occur before the B trigger occurs TRIGger:B:LEVel This command speciﬁes the level for the B trigger...
Page 122: Table 2-42: Vertical Commands
Command Groups Table 2-42: Vertical Commands Command Description Returns Aux Input connector parameters AUXin? AUXin:PRObe Returns all information concerning the probe attached to Aux Input connector AUXin:PRObe:AUTOZero Sets the TekVPI probe attached to the Aux Input connector to autozero AUXin:PRObe:CALibrate:CALIBRATABLe? This query indicates whether the attached probe is calibratable.
Page 123 Command Groups Table 2-42: Vertical Commands (cont.) Command Description CH<x>:PRObe:CALibrate:STATE? This query returns the calibration state of the probe connected to the speciﬁed channel. CH<x>:PRObe:COMMAND Sets the state of the speciﬁed probe control CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss Starts a degauss/autozero cycle on a TekVPI current probe attached to the speciﬁed channel input CH<x>:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE? Returns the state of the probe degauss...
Page 124: Video Picture Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-42: Vertical Commands (cont.) Command Description REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle This command speciﬁes the horizontal scale for a reference waveform REF<x>:LABel This command speciﬁes the speciﬁed reference waveform label REF<x>:TIMe? Returns the time that a reference waveform was stored REF<x>:VERTical:POSition This command speciﬁes the vertical position of the speciﬁed reference waveform REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle...
Page 125: Waveform Transfer Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-43: Video Picture Commands (cont.) Command Description VIDPic:LOCation:OFFSet Sets (or queries) the video picture line-to-line offset. This is the amount of additional delay time to add between lines of the video picture. VIDPic:LOCation:STARt:LINE Sets (or queries) the video picture starting line number. VIDPic:LOCation:STARt:PIXel Sets (or queries) the video picture starting pixel in each line VIDPic:LOCation:WIDth...
Page 126: Transferring A Waveform From An Oscilloscope To A Computer
Command Groups <binary data> is the binary data which should be exactly N-Digits bytes in length. NOTE. If you would like to save or recall a waveform to or from a ﬁle, use the SAVe:WAVEform RECAll:WAVEform commands. Transferring a Waveform Use the commands and commands to specify the attributes of...
Page 127 Command Groups Table 2-44: Example Command Sequence for Transferring Waveform Data from Oscilloscope to Computer (cont.) Item Description :HEADer 1 Turning on will allow you to view the HEADer VERBose WFMOutpre? parameters in context. :VERBose :WFMOutpre? query provides the information needed to interpret the waveform WFMOutpre? data point information that will be returned from the query.
Page 128 Command Groups MDO4MSO installed). When is set to one of these, the data points DATa:SOUrce are binary states (0 or 1). These data points can be transferred in widths of 1 or 2 bytes, as signed or unsigned integers. DIGital - The Digital Collection. These data points are binary states (0 or 1) that can be transferred in widths of 4 or 8 bytes, as signed or unsigned integers.
Page 129: Memory
Command Groups sources, the format is that for the RF frequency domain traces, which is 4-byte ﬂoating point data. NOTE. When you change the setting, all of the associated settings DATa:SOUrce for the waveform preamble ( commands) are automatically adjusted WFMOutpre for the speciﬁed source waveform.
Page 130: Oscilloscope
Command Groups NOTE. settings are directly WFMInpre:BYT_Nr WFMInpre:BIT_Nr related; setting one causes the other to be set accordingly. For example, causes to be set to 16 (2 * 8 bits/byte). WFMInpre:BYT_Nr 2 WFMInpre_BIT_Nr Similarly, setting to 16 causes to be WFMInpre:BIT_Nr WFMInpre:BYT_Nr set to 2.
Page 131: Scaling Waveform Data
Command Groups Scaling Waveform Data Once you transfer waveform data from an oscilloscope to a computer, you can convert the data points (which are digitizing levels) into engineering units such as Volts or Amps for analysis using information from the waveform preamble. The following is an example for converting transferred data into the appropriate engineering units.
Page 132: Further Explanation Of The Digital Collection
Command Groups = -500ms + 1ms * (1 - 1) = -500ms = -500ms + 1ms * (2 - 1) = -499ms . . . = -500ms + 1ms * (1000 - 1) = 499ms 1000 Vertical (amplitude) values: = YZEro + (YMUlt * DataPoint = 0.0V + (0.004 * DataPoint YZERO is in vertical units;...
Page 133: Table 2-46: Digital Collection: 4 Byte Data
Command Groups In this case, the Digital Collection data returned will be 32-bit packed integers, where each point is represented as follows. Note that the trigger state bit described below is only available when ACQuire:MAGnivu is 1 (on). Table 2-46: Digital Collection: 4 Byte Data Bit number Description 31–...
Page 134 Command Groups Table 2-47: Digital Collection: 8 Byte Data (cont.) Bit Number Description CH1 transition state MSB D15 transition state MSB D1 transition state MSB D0 transition state MSB 31 — 20 not used CH4 transition state LSB CH3 transition state LSB CH2 transition state LSB CH1 transition state LSB D15 transition state LSB...
Page 135: Table 2-48: Waveform Transfer Commands
Command Groups Table 2-48: Waveform Transfer Commands Command Description CURVe command transfers the waveform data points TO the oscilloscope’s internal CURVe reference memory location (REF1–4), which is speciﬁed by the DATa:DESTination command. The query transfers data FROM the oscilloscope; the source waveform CURVe? is speciﬁed by the command.
Page 136 Command Groups Table 2-48: Waveform Transfer Commands (cont.) Command Description DATa:WIDth This command speciﬁes the width, in bytes per point, for waveform data transferred from the scope via the query. (This command is synonymous with CURVe? WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr .) When the source is CH1-CH4, REF1-REF4, MATH, D0-D15, RF_AMPlitude, the default width is 1 byte.
Page 137 Command Groups Table 2-48: Waveform Transfer Commands (cont.) Command Description WFMInpre:PT_Off The set form of this command is ignored. The query form always returns a 0. WFMInpre:REFLevel This command speciﬁes the Reference Level of the incoming waveform. This command applies only to frequency domain waveforms. The Reference Level is adjustable from 10 pico Watts (–140dBm) to 1 Watt (+30dBm).
Page 138 Command Groups Table 2-48: Waveform Transfer Commands (cont.) Command Description WFMOutpre? This query returns the information needed to interpret the waveform data points returned by query. It returns the waveform transmission and formatting parameters for the CURVe? waveform speciﬁed by the DATa:SOUrce command.
Page 139 Command Groups Table 2-48: Waveform Transfer Commands (cont.) Command Description WFMOutpre:PT_ORder? This query returns the point ordering, which is always linear. WFMOutpre:REFLEvel? This query returns the Reference Level of the outgoing waveform. It applies only to the four frequency domain waveforms (RF Normal, RF Average, RF Max Hold, and RF Min Hold). WFMOutpre:SPAN? This query returns the frequency span of the outgoing waveform.
Page 140: Zoom Command Group
Command Groups Zoom Command Group Use the commands in the Zoom Command Group to expand and position the waveform display horizontally, without changing the time base settings. Table 2-49: Zoom Commands Description Command ZOOm? Returns the horizontal positioning and scaling of the zoom display ZOOm{:MODe|:STATE} This command speciﬁes the zoom mode ZOOm:ZOOM<x>?
Page 141: Commands Listed In Alphabetical Order
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACQuire? (Query Only) Returns the following current acquisition parameters: Stop after Acquisition state Mode Number of averages Sampling mode Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire? Related Commands ACQuire:MODe, ACQuire:NUMACq?, ACQuire:NUMAVg, ACQuire:STOPAfter ACQuire:FASTAcq Sets or queries the FastAcq feature. This feature provides a high-speed waveform capture rate to help capture signal anomalies.
Page 142 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACQuire:FASTAcq:PALEtte Sets (or queries) which palette to use for fast acquisition mode. Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire:FASTAcq:PALEtte {NORMal|TEMPErature|SPECTral|INVERTed} ACQuire:FASTAcq:PALEtte? Arguments – Normal displays hues and lightness levels for best overall viewing. NORMal The color of each channel waveform matches the color of the corresponding front-panel vertical knob.
Page 143 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments turns on fast acquisition mode. turns it off. Examples turns on fast acquisition mode. ACQ:FASTA:STATE ON ACQuire:MAGnivu Turns on the MagniVu feature, which provides up to 32 times signal detail for fast viewing of short events. This feature is not recommended for slow data formats such as RS-232.
Page 144 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACQuire:MODe Speciﬁes the acquisition mode of the oscilloscope for all analog channel waveforms. The acquisition mode determines how the ﬁnal value of the acquisition interval is generated from the many data samples. Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from acquisition intervals. Each acquisition interval represents a time duration set by the horizontal scale (time per division).
Page 145 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the acquisition mode to display a waveform that ACQUIRE:MODE ENVELOPE is an envelope of many individual waveform acquisitions. might return indicating that ACQUIRE:MODE? :ACQuire:MODe AVERAGE the displayed waveform is the average of the speciﬁed number of waveform acquisitions.
Page 146 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples speciﬁes that 16 waveform averages will be performed ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 16 before exponential averaging starts. might return indicating that there ACQUIRE:NUMAVG? :ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 64 are 64 acquisitions speciﬁed for averaging. ACQuire:NUMEnv This command controls the number of envelopes (when acquisition mode has been set to ENVelope using ACQuire:MODe).
Page 147 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire:STATE {OFF|ON|RUN|STOP|<NR1>} ACQuire:STATE? Related Commands ACQuire:STOPAfter Arguments stops acquisitions. stops acquisitions. STOP starts acquisitions. starts acquisitions. = 0 stops acquisitions; any other value starts acquisitions. <NR1> Examples starts the acquisition of waveform data and resets the count ACQUIRE:STATE RUN of the number of acquisitions.
Page 148 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the oscilloscope to continually acquire data. ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUnsTOP might return ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER? :ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE indicating that the next acquisition the oscilloscope makes will be of the single-sequence type. ACTONEVent:ACTION:AUXOUT:STATE Sends a pulse to the Auxiliary Out port when a speciﬁed event occurs, or queries the state of the “pulse to aux out”...
Page 149 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples ACTONEVENT:ACTION:EMAIL:SETUP:TOADDRESS sets the recipient’s email address to “george.wilcox@tektronix.com” george.wilcox@tektronix.com. ACTONEVent:ACTION:EMAIL:STATE Sends an email when a speciﬁed event occurs, or queries the state of the “send email” action. The default state is 0 (off). To specify an email address for the recipient, use the command ACTONEVent:ACTION:EMAIL:SETUp:TOADDRess To specify an event, use the command ACTONEVent:EVENTTYPe.
Page 150 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples speciﬁes to send a screen image to the ACTONEVENT:ACTION:PRINT:STATE ON printer when the speciﬁed event occurs. ACTONEVent:ACTION:SAVEIMAGE:STATE Saves a screen image to ﬁle when a speciﬁed event occurs, or queries the state of the “save screen image to a ﬁle” action. The default state is 0 (off). To specify an event, use the command ACTONEVent:EVENTTYPe.
Page 151 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACTONEVent:ACTION:SRQ:STATE Sets or returns the enabled state of the generate service request (SRQ) action when a speciﬁed event occurs. The default state is 0. When this control is set, the instrument will set the OPC bit (bit 0) in the SESR (Standard Events Status Register) when the speciﬁed event occurs.
Page 152 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments stops acquisitions when the speciﬁed event occurs. 1, ON turns off this action. 0, OFF Examples speciﬁes to stop acquisitions when ACTONEVENT:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE ON the speciﬁed event occurs. ACTONEVent:ACTION:VISUAL:STATE Displays a visual notiﬁcation when a speciﬁed event occurs, or queries the state of the “display a visual notiﬁcation”...
Page 153: Table 2-50:
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes to act when acquisition completes. ACQCOMPLete Examples speciﬁes to take action when ACTONEVENT:EVENTTYPE ACQCOMPLETE acquisition completes. ACTONEVent:NUMACQs Sets (or queries) the number of acquisitions to complete for the event type . The default is 1 acquisition. ACQCOMPLete To set the event type to , use the...
Page 154 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is an integer that speciﬁes the number of events to run. The default is 1 event and the maximum is 1000000 events. A repeat count greater than 1000000 speciﬁes to run forever. In this case, the action on event can be terminated by setting the state for all actions to OFF.
Page 155 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions MDO3000 series with option MDO3AFG installed and MDO4000C series with option MDO4AFG installed only. Group Syntax AFG:AMPLitude <NR3> AFG:AMPLitude? Arguments Floating point number that represents the AFG amplitude, peak to peak, in volts. Examples sets the AFG amplitude to 1.0 volts, peak to peak.
Page 156 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax AFG:ARBitrary:ARB<x>:LABel <QString> AFG:ARBitrary:ARB<x>:LABel? Arguments Quoted string that represents the waveform label for one of the arbitrary waveform slots 1-4. Examples “Foo” sets the waveform label for arbitrary waveform AFG:ARBITRARY:ARB4 slot 4 to “Foo.” AFG:ARBitrary:ARB<x>:TIMe? (Query Only) Returns the time that the data in the speciﬁed arbitrary waveform slot was saved.
Page 157 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return indicating that the currently selected AFG:ARB:EMEM:FUNC? SINE, arbitrary waveform function is Sine. AFG:ARBitrary:EMEM:GENerate (No Query Form) This command generates the arbitrary waveform function speciﬁed by the enumeration argument. The NR1 argument is optional; it can be used to specify the number of points;...
Page 158 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order will generate a 1000 point square wave. AFG:ARB:EMEM:GEN SQU 1000 AFG:ARBitrary:EMEM:NUMPoints? (Query Only) Returns the number of points in the AFB arbitrary waveform edit memory. This value will be used with the AFG:ARBitrary:EMEM:GENerate command in the event that the number of points is not speciﬁed. See the AFG:ARBitrary:EMEM:GENerate command description for more information.
Page 159 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. If a waveform does not specify points that extend to values of -1.0 and 1.0, then the waveform will not utilize the full available amplitude range. The resulting amplitude will be the fraction of the range speciﬁed by the points. For example, "AFG:ARBitrary:EMEM:POINTS 0.5,-0.5"...
Page 160 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax AFG.ARBitrary.EMEM.POINTS.BYTEORDer <LSB> |<MSB> AFG.ARBitrary.EMEM.POINTS.BYTEORDer? Arguments – Least signiﬁcant byte ﬁrst (little endian) – Most signiﬁcant byte ﬁrst (big endian) AFG:ARBitrary:EMEM:POINTS:ENCdg This command speciﬁes the data encoding format for the AFG:ARBitrary:EMEM: POINTS query (either ASCII or binary). The default is ASCii.
Page 161 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Frequency Function Resolution SINE 0.1Hz 50MHz 0.1Hz SQUare 0.1Hz 25MHz 0.1Hz PULSe ARBitrary LORENtz 0.1Hz 5MHz 0.1Hz GAUSsian ERISe EDECAy NOISe HAVERSINe SINC (Sin(x)/x) 0.1Hz 2MHz 0.1Hz 0.1Hz 500kHz 0.1Hz CARDIac RAMP DC and NOISe waveforms do not use the frequency setting. Frequency settings that are set when the AFG:FUNCtion is DC or NOISe are remembered and applied when the function is changed to other than DC or NOISe.
Page 162 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. The DC level is controlled by AFG:OFFSet. Conditions MDO3000 series with option MDO3AFG installed and MDO4000C series with option MDO4AFG installed only. Group Syntax AFG:FUNCtion {SINE|SQUare|PULSe|RAMP|NOISe|DC|SINC|GAUSsian|LORENtz |ERISe|EDECAy|HAVERSINe|CARDIac|ARBitrary} AFG:FUNCtion? Arguments SINE SQUare PULSe RAMP NOISe DC –...
Page 163 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order To set or query the amplitude or offset values, use the commands AFG:AMPLitude and AFG:OFFSet. NOTE. AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance command must be used before using any of the amplitude/offset/highLevel/lowLevel/Preset commands, so that saved setups are recalled with the proper load factor applied. The following values can be set for high level: AFG:HIGHLevel Setting Value Load Impedance...
Page 164 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the AFG high level value to 1.0 volts. AFG:HIGHLEVEL 1.0 AFG:LEVELPreset Sets (or queries) the AFG preset levels to values that correspond to the logic standard speciﬁed by the argument. The presets set the following vertical controls: AMPLitude OFFSet HIGHLevel...
Page 165 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions MDO3000 series with option MDO3AFG installed and MDO4000C series with option MDO4AFG installed only. Group Syntax AFG:LEVELPreset {CMOS_5_0V|CMOS_3_3V|CMOS_2_5V|ECL|TTL|USER} AFG:LEVELPreset? Arguments – standard 5-volt CMOS levels. Not available when the load CMOS_5_0V impedance is 50 Ohm. –...
Page 166 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order The following values can be set for low level: AFG:LOWLevel Setting Value Load Impedance Load Impedance FIFTY Ohm HIGHZ Resolution Resolution SINE -2.5V 1.24V -5.0V 2.49V SQUare PULSe RAMP NOISe HAVERSINe CARDIac ARBitrary SINC (Sin(x)/x) -1.518V 1.248V -3.036V...
Page 167 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order The maximum noise percent is limited when AFG:AMPLitude is greater than 50% of its maximum setting value for the current function, in accordance with the following formula: Noise Percent Max = 100.0 * (Amplitudemax/Amplitude – 1.0) Conditions MDO3000 series with option MDO3AFG installed and MDO4000C series with option MDO4AFG installed only.
Page 168 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AFG:OFFSet Sets (or queries) the AFG offset value, in volts. The offset values that can be speciﬁed for each function and load impedance are in the table below. (To specify the function and load impedance, use the commands AFG:FUNCtion and AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance.) NOTE.
Page 169 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the AFG offset to 1.0 volts. AFG:OFFSET 1.0 AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance Sets (or queries) the AFG output load impedance. Conditions MDO3000 series with option MDO3AFG installed and MDO4000C series with option MDO4AFG installed only. Group Syntax AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance {FIFty|HIGHZ} AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance?
Page 170 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AFG:PERIod Sets (or queries) the period of the AFG waveform, in seconds. (Period = 1.0/Frequency). The period value is constrained by the frequency max/min/resolution (see AFG:FREQuency). For example, frequency resolution steps from 0.1Hz to 1Hz, result in the following valid settings for period: 10, 5, 3.33…, 2.5, 2, 1.66…, 1.428571…, 1.25, 1.11…, 1.0.
Page 171 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Floating point number that represents the AFG phase, in degrees. Examples sets the phase of the AFG to -145.0 degrees. AFG:PHASE -145.0 AFG:PULse:WIDth Sets (or queries) the AFG pulse width, in seconds. Pulse width has an absolute minimum of 10ns and has a relative range of 10% - 90% of the current period setting.
Page 172 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the AFG ramp symmetry to 50 percent. AFG:RAMP:SYMMETRY 50.0 AFG:SQUare:DUty Sets (or queries) the AFG duty cycle, as a percentage. The minimum is 10.0%, maximum is 90.0% and increment is 0.10%. Conditions MDO3000 series with option MDO3AFG installed and MDO4000C series with option MDO4AFG installed only.
Page 173 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an error. To give a new alias the name of an existing alias, the existing alias must ﬁrst be deleted. Group Alias Syntax ALIas:DEFine <QString><,>{<QString>|<Block>} ALIas:DEFine? <QString>...
Page 174 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe] (No Query Form) Removes a speciﬁed alias. Group Alias Syntax ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe] <QString> Arguments is the name of the alias to remove. Using <QString> ALIas:DELEte[:NAMe] without specifying an alias causes an execution error. must be an <QString>...
Page 175 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Status and Error Syntax ALLEv? Related Commands *ESR?, EVMsg? Examples might return ALLEV? :ALLEV 2225,"Measurement error, No waveform to measure; "420,"Query UNTERMINATED;" APPLication:LICENSE:SLOT<x>:LOCation? (Query Only) This query returns the license location. < x> can be slot number 1-4 (1-2 for MDO3000 models).
Page 176 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order - The license is in the application module and the license from another BOTH application module of the same type has already been transferred to the scope. - The license is neither in the application module nor in the scope's NEITHER internal memory.
Page 177 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order If the license currently resides in the scope and the license does not also reside in the module, the license is transferred from the scope to the module. If the application module slot is empty, an error event is posted to the event queue so indicating and no operation is performed.
Page 178 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax APPLication:LICENSE:SLOT<x>:TYPe? Related Commands APPLication:LICENSE:SLOT<x>:TRANSFER, APPLication:LICENSE:SLOT<x>:LOCation? Examples might return indicating that APPLication:MODule:SLOT1:TYPe? DPO4AUTO, the DPO4AUTO license is installed in slot 1. APPLication:TYPe This command sets or returns the application type. These are the applications available when the front panel "Test" button is pressed. The query form will return if none of the supported test application modules are installed.
Page 179 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the application type to power analysis. POWer sets the application type to limit mask test. LIMITMask sets the application type to video picture. VIDPic sets the application type to act on event. ACTONEVent NONe Returns The query form will return...
Page 180 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax AUTOSet:ENAble {OFF|ON|0|1} AUTOSet:ENAble? Arguments disables autoset. OFF or 0 enables autoset. ON or 1 Examples enables the front-panel Autoset button. AUTOSET:ENABLE 1 ? might return indicating that the autoset AUTOSET:ENABLE AUTOSET:ENABLE 0 feature is disabled. AUXin? (Query Only) Returns all Aux Input connector parameters.
Page 181 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AUXin:PRObe:AUTOZero (No Query Form) This command executes the attached probe’s Auto Zero function, for probes that support this feature. See your probe documentation for more details. Conditions Available for MSO/DPO4000B series models, 2-channel MDO3000 models, and MDO4000C models without option SA3 or SA6 only.
Page 182 <QString> the probe attached to the Aux Input connector. Examples turns the output of a Tektronix AUXIN:PROBE:COMMAND “OUTPUT”, “ON” VPI-DPG probe on. sets a Tektronix VPI-DPG AUXIN:PROBE:COMMAND “MODE”, “4–4V1MHz”...
Page 183 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AUXin:PRObe:DEGAUss:STATE? (Query Only) Returns the state of the probe degauss ( NEEDED RECOMMENDED PASSED ). The command will return for probes that do not FAILED RUNNING PASSED support degauss operations. Conditions Available for MSO/DPO4000B series models, 2-channel MDO3000 models, and MDO4000C models without option SA3 or SA6 only.
Page 184 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Vertical Syntax AUXin:PRObe:GAIN <NR3> AUXin:PRObe:GAIN? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the probe gain, which is probe <NR3> dependent. Examples might return indicating that the attached AUXin:PROBE:GAIN? 100.0000E-3 10x probe delivers 0.1 V to the Aux In BNC for every 1.0 V applied to the probe input.
Page 185 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions Available for MSO/DPO4000B series models, 2-channel MDO3000 models, and MDO4000C models without option SA3 or SA6 only. Group Vertical Syntax AUXin:PRObe:RESistance? Examples might return AUXin:PRObe:RESistance? :AUXin:PROBE:RESISTANCE indicating that the input resistance of the probe attached to the front 1.0000E+6 panel Aux In connector is 1 MΩ.
Page 186 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Vertical Syntax AUXin:PRObe:UNIts? Examples might return: indicating AUXin:PROBE:UNITS? :AUXin:PROBE:UNITS “V” that the units of measure for the attached probe are volts. AUXOut:SOUrce This command sets (or queries) the source for the Auxiliary Output port. Group Miscellaneous Syntax...
Page 187 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax BUS? BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate This command speciﬁes the bit rate for the ARINC429 bus. Conditions This command requires installation of a DPO4AERO application module for MDO4000C models, or MDO3AERO for MDO3000 models. Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate {LOW|HI|<NR1>} BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:BITRate? Arguments sets the ARINC429 bit rate to handle low speed signals (12000...
Page 188 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the ARINC429 DATA ﬁeld width to 23 bits wide (covering SDIDATASSM bits 9 through 31 of the 32 bit packet) Examples sets the ARINC429 DATA ﬁeld to BUS:B1:ARINC429A:DATA:FORMAT DATA 19 bits wide. might return SDIDATASSM, indicating BUS:B1:ARINC429A:DATA:FORMAT? that the ARINC429 DATA ﬁeld is 23 bits wide.
Page 189 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires installation of a DPO4AERO application module for MDO4000C models, or MDO3AERO for MDO3000 models. Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4} BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SOUrce? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:CONDition BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SOUrce Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the source for the differential input. CH1-4 speciﬁes the math waveform as the source for differential input.
Page 190 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the bit delay to 2. BUS:B1:AUDIO:BITDELAY 2 might return BUS:B1:AUDIO:BITDELAY? :BUS:B1:AUDIO:BITDELAY 1 indicating that the number of delay bits is 1. BUS:B<x>:AUDio:BITOrder Speciﬁes the bit order for the AUDIO bus. Conditions This command requires the DPO4AUDIO application module for the MDO4000/B/C series, or the MDO3AUDIO for MDO3000 series.
Page 191 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CHANnel:SIZe <NR1> BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CHANnel:SIZe? Arguments speciﬁes the number of bits per channel. <NR1> Examples sets the number of bits per channel to 8. BUS:B1:AUDIO:CHANNEL:SIZE 8 might return BUS:B1:AUDIO:CHANNEL:SIZE? indicating that the number of bits per :BUS:B1:AUDIO:CHANNEL:SIZe 24 channel is 24.
Page 192 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4| D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15} BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CLOCk:SOUrce? Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the clock source waveform for the audio CH1–CH4 bus. speciﬁes a digital channel as the clock source waveform for the audio D0-D15 bus. (MSO/MDO4000/B models only as well as MDO3000 and MDO4000C models with option MDO3MSO or MDO4MSO installed.) Examples sets D1 as the clock source for the audio...
Page 193 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:SIZe Speciﬁes the number of bits per word for the AUDIO bus. NOTE. The number of bits speciﬁed for this command must be always less than or equal to the number of bits per channel (set using BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CHANnel:SIZe).
Page 194 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes a digital channel as the data source waveform for the audio bus. D0-D15 (MSO/MDO4000/B models only as well as MDO3000 and MDO4000C models with option MDO3MSO or MDO4MSO installed.) Examples sets the data source to D1. BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:SOURCE D1 might return BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:SOURCE?
Page 195 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires the DPO4AUDIO application module for the MDO4000/B/C series, or the MDO3AUDIO for MDO3000 series. Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAME:SIZe <NR1> BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAME:SIZe? Arguments speciﬁes the number of channels in each frame. <NR1> Examples sets the frame size to 2. BUS:B1:AUDIO:FRAME:SIZE 2 might return BUS:B1:AUDIO:FRAME:SIZE?
Page 196 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAMESync:SOUrce Speciﬁes the frame sync source waveform for the AUDIO bus. Conditions This command requires the DPO4AUDIO application module for the MDO4000/B/C series, or the MDO3AUDIO for MDO3000 series. Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAMESync:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4| D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15} BUS:B<x>:AUDio:FRAMESync:SOUrce? Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the frame sync source waveform.
Page 197 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes the right justiﬁed audio format. speciﬁes the time-division multiplexing audio format. Examples sets right-justiﬁed as the audio format. BUS:B1:AUDIO:TYPE RJ might return indicating BUS:B1:AUDIO:TYPE? :BUS:B1:AUDIO:TYPE I2S that the audio format is set to I BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:POLarity Speciﬁes the word select polarity for the AUDIO bus.
Page 198 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4 |D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15} BUS:B<x>:AUDio:WORDSel:SOUrce? Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the word select source waveform . CH1–CH4 speciﬁes a digital channel as the word select source waveform. D0-D15 (MSO/MDO4000/B models only as well as MDO3000 and MDO400C models with option MDO3MSO or MDO4MSO installed.) Examples sets CH1 as the word select source.
Page 199 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate Speciﬁes the FD bit rate for the CAN bus. This is the bitrate used for CAN FD frames transmitted with increased data phase rates. The maximum bitrate for MDO3000 models is 7 Mbps. The maximum bitrate for MDO4000C models is 10 Mbps.
Page 200 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the CAN FD standard to ISO CAN FD (11898-1:2015) sets the CAN FD standard to non-ISO CAN FD (Bosch:2012) NONISO Examples sets the CAN FD standard to ISO CAN FD. BUS:B1:CAN:FD:STANDard ISO might return :BUS:B1:CAN:FD:STANDARD BUS:B1:CAN:FD:STANDard? NONISO, indicating that the CAN FD standard is non-ISO CAN FD.
Page 201 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint <NR1> BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint? Arguments is the sample point in percent. Values can be any integer from 5 to 95. <NR1> For a CAN 2.0 bus the allowable sample point range is 5% to 95%. For a CAN FD bus the allowable sample point range is 15% to 95%.
Page 202: Table 2-51: Supported Display Formats
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This feature requires installation of a DPO4AUTO or DPO4AUTOMAX application module for MDO4000C models, or MDO3AUTO for MDO3000 models. Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard{CAN2X|CANFD} string BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard? Arguments sets the CAN bus standard to CAN 2.0 CAN2X sets the CAN bus standard to CAN FD CANFD...
Page 203 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMat {BINary|HEXadecimal|ASCII|MIXed|MIXED2|BLOCKHEX} BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMat? Related Commands BUS:B<x>:TYPe Arguments – All values are displayed in binary. BINary – All values are displayed in hexadecimal. HEXadecimal – All values are displayed in an ASCII format, for RS-232 only. ASCII –...
Page 204 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:PRObe {DIFFerential|SINGleended} BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:PRObe? Related Commands BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DIFFerential BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs Arguments DIFFerential SINGleended Examples speciﬁes that BUS:B1:ETHERnet:PRObe DIFFerential a differential probe is connected to the input channels speciﬁed by BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus. might return , indicating that the BUS:B1:ETHERnet:PRObe? SINGLEENDED probe type has been set to single-ended.
Page 205 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition Arguments sets the Ethernet protocol type to Internet Protocol version 4. IPv4 sets the Ethernet protocol type to other than IPv4. OTHER Examples speciﬁes IPv4 as the Ethernet protocol. BUS:B1:ETHERnet:PROTOcol IPv4 might return OTHER. BUS:B1:ETHERnet:PROTOcol? BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DIFFerential This command speciﬁes the Ethernet data source for differential input.
Page 206 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return CH2, indicating BUS:B1:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DIFFerential? that channel 2 is the currently speciﬁed source for Ethernet data differential input. BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus This command speciﬁes the Ethernet data source for D- input for single-ended probing. The default is Channel 2. Conditions This command requires a DPO4ENET application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models.
Page 207 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|D0|D1|D2|D3| D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15} BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DPLUs? Related Commands BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:PRObe BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:SOUrce:DMINus Arguments speciﬁes to use one of the analog channels 1–4 as the Ethernet data source CH1–4 for the D+ input. speciﬁes to use one of the digital channels D0 — D15 as the Ethernet D0–D15 data source for the D+ input.
Page 208 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the Ethernet type as 10Base-T standard. This standard ENET10BASET supports data transfer rates up to 10 Mbps (also called Twisted Pair Ethernet). speciﬁes the Ethernet type as 100Base-T standard. This ENET100BASETX standard supports data transfer rates up to 100 Mbps (also called Fast Ethernet). Examples speciﬁes the Ethernet type as BUS:B1:ETHERnet:TYPe ENET100BASETX...
Page 209 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CHannel {A|B} BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CHannel? Arguments sets the FlexRay ID format to channel A. sets the FlexRay ID format to channel B. Examples sets the ID format to channel B. BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CHANNEL B might return BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CHANNEL? BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CHANNEL A indicating that the ID format is channel A.
Page 210 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTOMAX application module for 4000 series models, and MDO3FLEX application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10 |D11|D12|D13|D14|D15} BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:SOUrce? Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the source waveform. CH1–CH4 speciﬁes a digital channel as the source waveform.
Page 211 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples includes the read/write bit in the BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:RWINCLUDE ON address. might return BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:RWINCLUDE? indicating the read/write bit is not BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:RWINCLUDE 0 included in the address. BUS:B<x>:I2C{:CLOCk|:SCLk}:SOUrce This command speciﬁes the SCLK source for the I2C bus. Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3EMBD application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 212 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the I2C SDATA source waveform. CH1–CH4 speciﬁes a digital channel as the I2C SDATA source waveform. D0–D15 (MSO/MDO4000/B models only as well as MDO3000 and MDO400C models with option MDO3MSO or MDO4MSO installed.) BUS:B<x>:LABel Speciﬁes the waveform label for the bus.
Page 213 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat Speciﬁes the LIN bus ID format. Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4AUTOMAX application module for all 4000 series models, and the MDO3AUTO application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat {NOPARity|PARity} BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat? Arguments sets the LIN bus ID format to no parity.
Page 214 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the polarity to INVERTED. BUS:B1:LIN:POLARITY INVERTED might return BUS:B1:LIN:POLARITY? BUS:B1:LIN:POLARITY NORMAL indicating the polarity is normal. BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint Speciﬁes the point to sample during each bit period, as a percent, for the LIN bus. Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4AUTOMAX application module for all 4000 series models, and the MDO3AUTO application module...
Page 215 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the source waveform. CH1–CH4 speciﬁes a digital channel as the source waveform. D0-D15 (MSO/MDO4000/B models only as well as MDO3000 and MDO400C models with option MDO3MSO or MDO4MSO installed.) Examples sets the source waveform to channel 4.
Page 216 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:POLarity {NORMal|INVERTed} BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:POLarity? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:SOUrce Arguments - A high-low transition represents a 1 on the Data+ line. NORMal - A high-low transition represents a 0 on the Data+ line. INVERTed Examples sets the polarity so that a high-low BUS:B1:MIL1553B:POLarity INVERTED...
Page 217 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples 12.0E-6 speciﬁes the maximum BUS:B1:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime:MAXimum response time to a valid command received to be 12.0000E-6 microseconds. might return 12.0000E-6. BUS:B1:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime:MAXimum? BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:RESPonsetime:MINimum This command speciﬁes the minimum response time to a valid command issued for the MIL-STD-1553 bus. NOTE.
Page 218 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4} BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:SOUrce? Related Commands BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:PRObe SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the source for differential input. CH1–4 speciﬁes the math waveform as the MIL-STD-1553 bus source for MATH differential input speciﬁes a reference waveform as the source for differential input.
Page 219 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the bit source waveform. CH1–CH4 speciﬁes a digital channel as the bit source waveform. D0-D15 (MSO/MDO4000/B models only as well as MDO3000 and MDO400C models with option MDO3MSO or MDO4MSO installed.) BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:EDGE Speciﬁes the clock edge for the parallel bus.
Page 220 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:SOUrce Speciﬁes the clock source waveform for the parallel bus. Conditions Requires an MSO/MDO model, with the MDO3MSO option installed for the MDO3000 series. The MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models can trigger on parallel buses without an application module. Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|...
Page 221 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:POSition <NR3> BUS:B<x>:POSition? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the position of the bus <x> <NR3> waveform on the display. BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate This command speciﬁes the bit rate for the RS-232 bus. Conditions This command requires a DPO4COMP application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3COMP application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 222 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter This command speciﬁes the delimiting value for a packet on the RS-232 bus. Conditions This command requires a DPO4COMP application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3COMP application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter {NULl|LF|CR|SPace|XFF}...
Page 223 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4COMP application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3COMP application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity {NONe|EVEN|ODD} BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity? Arguments speciﬁes no parity. NONe speciﬁes even parity. EVEN speciﬁes odd parity.
Page 224 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4| D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|Off} BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:SOUrce? Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the RX source waveform. CH1–CH4 speciﬁes a digital channel as the RX source waveform. D0-D15 (MSO/MDO4000/B models only as well as MDO3000 and MDO400C models with option MDO3MSO or MDO4MSO installed.) sets the speciﬁed bus input to off.
Page 225 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder {LSB|MSB} BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder? Arguments sets the bit order to least signiﬁcant bit ﬁrst. sets the bit order to most signiﬁcant bit ﬁrst. Examples sets the bit order to least signiﬁcant bit ﬁrst. BUS:B1:SPI:BITORDER LSB might return BUS:B1:SPI:BITORDER? BUS:B1:SPI:BITORDER MSB...
Page 226 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCk|:SCLk}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4| D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15} BUS:B<x>:SPI{:CLOCk|:SCLk}:SOUrce? Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the SCLK source waveform. CH1–CH4 speciﬁes a digital channel as the SCLK source waveform. D0-D15 (MSO/MDO4000/B models only as well as MDO3000 and MDO400C models with option MDO3MSO or MDO4MSO installed.) BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:IN|:MISO}:POLarity This command speciﬁes the MISO polarity for the SPI bus.
Page 227 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the MISO source waveform. CH1–CH4 speciﬁes a digital channel as the MISO source waveform. D0-D15 (MSO/MDO4000/B models only as well as MDO3000 and MDO400C models with option MDO3MSO or MDO4MSO installed.) BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:MOSI}:POLarity This command speciﬁes the MOSI polarity for the SPI bus.
Page 228 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe This command speciﬁes the number of bits per word (data size) for the speciﬁed SPI bus. Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3EMBD application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe <NR1>...
Page 229 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime This command speciﬁes the idle time, in seconds, for the SPI bus. Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3EMBD application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime <NR3>...
Page 230 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3EMBD application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4| D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15} BUS:B<x>:SPI{:SELect|:SS}:SOUrce? Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the source waveform. CH1–CH4 speciﬁes a digital channel as the source waveform.
Page 231 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax BUS:B<x>:TYPe {I2C|SPI|CAN|RS232C|PARallel|USB|LIN|FLEXRay|AUDio|ETHERnet| MIL1553B|ARINC429A} BUS:B<x>:TYPe? Arguments speciﬁes the Inter-IC bus. speciﬁes the Serial Peripheral Interface bus (not available on two-channel models). speciﬁes the Controller Area Network bus. speciﬁes the RS-232C bus. RS232C speciﬁes the Parallel bus. PARallel speciﬁes the USB bus.
Page 232 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order indicates the bit rate is 480 Mbps. HIGH Examples sets the bit rate to 12 Mbps. BUS:B1:USB:BITRATE FULL might return , which BUS:B1:USB:BITRATE? :BUS:B1:USB:BITRATE LOW indicates that the bit rate is 1.5 Mbps. BUS:B<x>:USB:PRObe This command speciﬁes the type of probe connected to the USB bus. Conditions This command requires a DPO4USB application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3USB application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 233 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DIFFerential {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4} BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DIFFerential? Arguments speciﬁes an analog waveform as the source. This channel should have CH1–4 an attached differential probe. speciﬁes the math waveform as the source. MATH speciﬁes a reference waveform as the source. REF1–4 Examples sets the source to channel 2.
Page 234 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the source to channel 2. BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE:DMINUS CH2 might return BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE:DMINUS? :BUS:B1:USB:SOURCE:DMINUS indicating that channel 4 is the source. BUS:B<x>:USB:SOUrce:DPLUs This command speciﬁes the source for the USB D+ input. If you are using single-ended probes, you need to set the sources for both the D+ and D- inputs.
Page 235 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the threshold, in volts. <NR3> speciﬁes a preset ECL high level of -1.3V. speciﬁes a preset TTL high level of 1.4V. Examples sets the CH1 lower threshold to 800mV. BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1 TTL might return BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1?
Page 236 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax BUS:LOWerthreshold:REF<x> {<NR3>|ECL|TTL} BUS:LOWerthreshold:REF<x>? Related Commands BUS:UPPerthreshold:REF<x> Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the lower threshold for the <NR3> reference waveform, in volts – ECL (-1.3 volts). Note that this setting is constrained, depending upon the vertical scale for the speciﬁed reference waveform.
Page 237 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. MDO3000 models only have two digital threshold controls: one for digital channels D0 - D7, and the other for D8 - D15. Changing one digital channel’s threshold level changes all of the channels’ levels in the same set. Group Syntax BUS:THReshold:D<x>...
Page 238 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax BUS:UPPerthreshold{:MATH|:MATH1} {<NR3>|ECL|TTL} BUS:UPPerthreshold{:MATH|:MATH1}? Related Commands BUS:LOWerthreshold{:MATH|:MATH1} Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the upper threshold of the math <NR3> waveform, in volts. – ECL (-1.3 volts). Note that this setting is constrained, depending upon the vertical scale for the speciﬁed math waveform.
Page 239 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the upper threshold for reference BUS:UPPerthreshold:REF2 TTL waveform 2 to 1.4000. might return 0.0E+0, which is the default. BUS:UPPerthreshold:REF3? BUSY? (Query Only) Returns the status of the oscilloscope. This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program.
Page 240 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order = 0 indicates the calibration completed without errors. <NR1> Examples starts the internal signal path calibration and might return 0 to indicate that *CAL? the calibration was successful. CALibrate:FACtory:STATus? (Query Only) Returns the factory calibration status value saved in nonvolatile memory. Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax...
Page 241 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CALibrate:FACtory:STATus:RF? (Query Only) Returns the factory calibration status value saved in nonvolatile memory for the RF portion of the oscilloscope. This query is synonymous with CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:RF?. Conditions MDO models only Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate:FACtory:STATus:RF? Returns PASS: shows the RF portion of the factory calibration has succeeded.
Page 242 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return CAL:FAC:STAT:SCOPE? CALIBRATE:FACTORY:STATUS:SCOPE indicating that factory calibration passed. PASS CALibrate:INTERNal (No Query Form) This command starts a signal path compensation. NOTE. Disconnect or otherwise remove all input signals prior to starting self-calibration. The self-calibration can take several minutes to complete. Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax...
Page 243 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples initiates the internal signal path calibration of CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:START the oscilloscope. CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? (Query Only) Returns the current status of the oscilloscope internal signal path calibration for the last SPC operation. NOTE. Disconnect or otherwise remove all input signals prior to starting self-calibration.
Page 244 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Returns This query will return one of the following: indicates the RF portion of the instrument has not been calibrated. INIT indicates the RF internal calibration completed successfully. PASS indicates the oscilloscope internal calibration is currently running. RUNNING indicates the RF internal calibration did not complete successfully.
Page 245 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order common, however, to use uncalibrated probes (particularly when the oscilloscope inputs are connected into a test system with coaxial cables). Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate:RESults? Related Commands *CAL? CALibrate:RESults:FACtory? (Query Only) Returns the status of internal and factory calibration, without performing any calibration operations.
Page 246 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:RF? (Query Only) This query returns the factory calibration status for the RF portion of the instrument, if present. This query is synonymous with CALibrate:FACtory:STATus:RF? Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate:RESults:FACtory:RF? Returns - factory calibration has passed PASS - factory calibration is unadjusted INIT...
Page 247 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CALibrate:RESults:SPC? (Query Only) Returns the status of the SPC operation. This query does not initiate a SPC. Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate:RESults:SPC? Related Commands *CAL? Returns indicates that SPC has never successfully completed. INIT indicates that the last SPC operation passed.
Page 248 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CALibrate:RESults:SPC:SCOPE? (Query Only) This query returns the status of the last SPC run for the oscilloscope portion of the instrument (doesn't include the RF portion). This query is synonymous to CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus:SCOPE? Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate:RESults:SPC:SCOPE? Returns...
Page 249 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands *CAL?, CALibrate:RESults:SPC?, CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt, CALibrate:RF:STATus? CALibrate:RF:STARt (No Query Form) This command is identical to CALIBRATE:RF. NOTE. Disconnect or otherwise remove all input signals prior to starting self-calibration. The self-calibration can take several minutes to complete. Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only.
Page 250 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CH<x>? CH<x>:AMPSVIAVOLTs:ENAble This command speciﬁes the state of the amps via volts feature for the speciﬁed channel. This feature supports measuring current via the voltage drop across a resistor (1–4). Group Vertical Syntax CH<x>:AMPSVIAVOLTs:ENAble {<NR1>|OFF|ON} CH<x>:AMPSVIAVOLTs:ENAble? Arguments sets the amps via volts function for channel <x>...
Page 251 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH<x>:BANdwidth This command speciﬁes the selectable low-pass bandwidth limit ﬁlter for channel <x>, where x is the channel number (1–4). Available bandwidth limits vary by model, and are also inﬂuenced by attached probes. Furthermore, some oscilloscope models support options to increase the analog bandwidth.
Page 252 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order channel that has no probe attached or a probe that does not support DCREJect coupling attached results in a settings conﬂict error event and the coupling remains unchanged. Examples sets channel 2 to AC coupling. CH2:COUPLING AC might return indicating that channel 3...
Page 253 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CH<x>:INVert {ON|OFF} CH<x>:INVert? Arguments sets the invert function for channel <x> to off. sets the invert function for channel <x> to on. Examples inverts the waveform on channel 4. CH4:INVert ON might return indicating that channel 2 is not CH2:INVert? :CH2:INVERT 0 inverted.
Page 254: Table 2-52: Channel Offset Range
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2-52: Channel Offset Range Offset range V/Div Setting 1 MΩ Input 50 Ω Input 1 mV/div — 50 mV/div ±1 V ±1 V 50.5 mV/div — 99.5 mV/div ±0.5 V ±0.5 V 100 mV/div — 500 mV/div ±10 V ±5 V 505 mV/div —...
Page 255 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order if the position for Channel 3 is set to 2.0 and the offset is set to 3.0, then input signals equal to 3.0 units are displayed 2.0 divisions above the center of the screen (at 1 V/div). Group Vertical Syntax...
Page 256 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples performs the AutoZero function in the probe. EXECute CH<x>:PRObe:CALibrate (No Query Form) This command executes a calibration or initialization for the probe attached to channel 1–4, if the probe is calibratable. To determine whether the probe is calibratable, use CH<x>:PRObe:CALibrate:CALIBRATABLe?.
Page 257 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return 0, indicating that the CH2:PRObe:CALibrate:CALIBRATABLe? probe attached to channel 2 is not calibratable. CH<x>:PRObe:CALibrate:STATE? (Query Only) This query returns the calibration state of the probe connected to the speciﬁed channel. If the probe is calibratable, the state could be either DEFAULT (not calibrated), COMPensated, or RUNNING (calibration is proceeding).
Page 258 <QString> the probe attached to the speciﬁed channel. Examples sets a Tektronix VPI-DPG probe CH1:PROBE:COMMAND “MODE”, “4–4V1MHz” to the 4-4V1MHz mode. turns the output of a Tektronix CH1:PROBE:COMMAND “OUTPUT”, “ON” VPI-DPG probe on. might return CH1:PROBE:COMMAND?“MODE” CH1:PROBE:COMMAND “MODE”,“4-4V1MHZ”...
Page 259 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order indicates the measurement accuracy might be improved by RECOMMENDED degaussing the probe. indicates the probe is degaussed. PASSED indicates the degauss operation failed. FAILED indicates the probe degauss operation is currently in progress. RUNNING CH<x>:PRObe:FORCEDRange This command speciﬁes the range of a TekVPI probe attached to the channel speciﬁed by <x>, where x is the channel number.
Page 260 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the probe gain. Allowed values <NR3> depend on the speciﬁc probe. Examples might return indicating CH2:PROBE:GAIN? :CH2:PROBE:GAIN 0.1000E+00 that the attached 10x probe delivers 1 V to the channel 2 BNC for every 10 V applied to the probe input.
Page 261 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe? (Query Only) Returns the type of probe attached to the channel speciﬁed by <x>, where x is the channel number. Level 2 (or higher) probes supply their exact product nomenclature; for Level 0 or 1 probes, a generic “No Probe Detected message is returned.
Page 262 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:PROPDELay <NR3> CH<x>:PRObe:PROPDELay? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the propagation time delay for the <NR3> connected probe. Examples sets the CH1 propagation delay to 100 ps. CH1:PROBE:PROPDELAY 100E-12 might return CH1:PROBE:PROPDELAY? :CH1:PROBE:PROPDELAY 1.1E-9 indicating that the CH1 propagation delay is set to 1.1 ns.
Page 263 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH<x>:PRObe:SIGnal This command speciﬁes the input bypass setting of a TekVPI probe attached to channel <x>, where x is the channel number. The probe must support input bypass, for example TCP0001. This command is ignored if sent to an unsupported probe. Group Vertical Syntax...
Page 264 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Vertical Syntax CH<x>:SCAle <NR3> CH<x>:SCAle? Related Commands CH<x>:OFFSet, CH<x>:POSition, REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle, MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the vertical channel scale in <NR3> units-per-division. The value entered here is truncated to three signiﬁcant digits. Examples sets the channel 4 scale to 100 mV per division.
Page 265 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH<x>:YUNits This command speciﬁes the vertical units for the channel speciﬁed by <x>, where x is the channel number. String arguments are case insensitive and any unsupported units will generate an error. Supported units are: %, /Hz, A, A/A, A/V, A/W, A/dB, A/s, AA, AW, AdB, As, B, Hz, IRE, S/s, V, V/A, V/V, V/W, V/dB, V/s, VV, VW, VdB, volts, Vs, W, W/A, W/V, W/W, W/dB, W/s, WA, WV, WW, WdB, Ws, dB, dB/A, dB/V, dB/W, dB/dB, dBA, dBV, dBW,...
Page 266 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order *CLS (No Query Form) Clears the following: Event Queue Standard Event Status Register Status Byte Register (except the MAV bit) If the *CLS command immediately follows an <EOI>, the Output Queue and MAV bit (Status Byte Register bit 4) are also cleared. The MAV bit indicates that information is in the output queue.
Page 267 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CONFIGuration:AFG? (Query Only) Indicates whether or not the arbitrary function generator hardware is present, and the arbitrary function generation feature is enabled. Conditions Available for MDO3000 and MDO4000C series models only. Group Conﬁguration Syntax CONFIGuration:AFG? Returns indicates that the arbitrary function generator hardware is present and the AFG feature is enabled.
Page 268 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Conﬁguration Syntax CONFIGuration:ANALOg:GNDCPLG? Related Commands (See page 2-91, Vertical Command Group.) Returns CONFIGuration:ANALOg:MAXBANDWidth? (Query Only) This query returns the maximum bandwidth for analog channels. Group Conﬁguration Syntax CONFIGuration:ANALOg:MAXBANDWidth? Related Commands (See page 2-29, Horizontal Command Group.) Returns , which is a ﬂoating point number that represents the maximum bandwidth, <NR3>...
Page 269 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CONFIGuration:ANALOg:NUMCHANnels? (Query Only) This query returns the number of analog channels. Group Conﬁguration Syntax CONFIGuration:ANALOg:NUMCHANnels? Returns <NR1> CONFIGuration:ANALOg:RECLENS? (Query Only) This query returns a comma-separated list of supported record lengths for the analog channels. Group Conﬁguration Syntax CONFIGuration:ANALOg:RECLENS?
Page 270 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CONFIGuration:APPLications:CUSTOMMask? (Query Only) Indicates whether the Custom Mask test feature is present and enabled. Conditions Requires installation of a DPO4LMT application module, or an MDO3LMT for MDO3000 models. Group Conﬁguration Syntax CONFIGuration:APPLications:CUSTOMMask? Returns indicates that the Custom Mask test feature is present and enabled. indicates that either the Custom Mask test feature is not present, or it is not enabled.
Page 271 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CONFIGuration:APPLications:POWer? (Query Only) This query returns a boolean value to indicate whether the optional power application feature is present. Conditions This feature requires installation of a DPO4PWR application module, or MDO3PWR for MDO3000 models. Group Conﬁguration Syntax CONFIGuration:APPLications:POWer?
Page 272 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CONFIGuration:APPLications:VIDPIC? (Query Only) Indicates whether the Video Picture feature is present and enabled. Conditions Available for MDO3000 and MDO4000C series models. Requires the DPO4VID application module for use with MSO/DPO4000B, MDO4000 and MDO4000B models. Group Conﬁguration Syntax CONFIGuration:APPLications:VIDPIC?
Page 273 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return 1, indicating that the hardware is present and the CONFIG:ARB? feature is enabled. CONFIGuration:AUXIN? (Query Only) This query returns a boolean value to indicate whether the instrument has an Aux Input connector. NOTE.
Page 274 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Returns if the ARINC429 bus feature is present. <NR1> = 1 if the ARINC429 bus feature is not present. <NR1> = 0 CONFIGuration:BUSWAVEFORMS:AUDIO? (Query Only) This query returns a boolean value to indicate whether the optional audio bus triggering and analysis feature is present.
Page 275 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (See page 2-61, Search Command Group.) Returns = 1 if the CAN bus feature is present. <NR1> = 0 if the CAN bus feature is not present. <NR1> CONFIGuration:BUSWAVEFORMS:CANFD? (Query Only) This query returns a Boolean value to indicate whether the optional CAN FD bus triggering and analysis feature is present.
Page 276 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (See page 2-76, Trigger Command Group.) (See page 2-61, Search Command Group.) Returns = 1 if the Ethernet feature is present. <NR1> = 0 if the Ethernet feature is not present. <NR1> CONFIGuration:BUSWAVEFORMS:FLEXRAY? (Query Only) This query returns a boolean value to indicate whether the optional FlexRay bus triggering and analysis feature is present.
Page 277 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CONFIGuration:BUSWAVEFORMS:I2C? Related Commands (See page 2-15, Bus Command Group.) (See page 2-76, Trigger Command Group.) (See page 2-61, Search Command Group.) Returns = 1 if the I C bus feature is present. <NR1> = 0 if the I C bus feature is not present.
Page 278 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Conﬁguration Syntax CONFIGuration:BUSWAVEFORMS:MIL1553B? Related Commands (See page 2-15, Bus Command Group.) (See page 2-76, Trigger Command Group.) (See page 2-61, Search Command Group.) Returns = 1 if the MIL-STD-1553 bus feature is present. <NR1> = 0 if the MIL-STD-1553 bus feature is not present.
Page 279 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order = 0 if the parallel bus feature is not present. <NR1> CONFIGuration:BUSWAVEFORMS:RS232C? (Query Only) This query returns a boolean value to indicate whether the optional RS232 bus triggering and analysis feature is present. Conditions This feature requires installation of a DPO4COMP application module, or MDO3COMP for MDO3000 models.
Page 280 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Returns = 1 if the SPI bus feature is present. <NR1> = 0 if the SPI bus feature is not present. <NR1> CONFIGuration:BUSWAVEFORMS:USB? (Query Only) This query returns a boolean value to indicate whether the USB bus triggering and analysis feature is present.
Page 281 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (See page 2-76, Trigger Command Group.) (See page 2-61, Search Command Group.) Returns = 1 if the high-speed USB bus feature is present. <NR1> = 0 if the high-speed USB bus feature is not present. <NR1>...
Page 282 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CONFIGuration:DIGITAl:NUMCHANnels? (Query Only) This query returns the number of digital channels. Group Conﬁguration Syntax CONFIGuration:DIGITAl:NUMCHANnels? Returns <NR1> CONFIGuration:DVM? (Query Only) Indicates whether the Digital Voltmeter hardware is present, and the DVM feature is enabled. Group Conﬁguration Syntax CONFIGuration:DVM?
Page 283 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CONFIGuration:EXTVIDEO? Related Commands (See page 2-76, Trigger Command Group.) Returns = 1 if the extended video trigger features are present. <NR1> = 0 if the extended video trigger features are not present. <NR1> CONFIGuration:HISTOGRAM? (Query Only) This query returns a boolean value to indicate whether the waveform histogram feature is present.
Page 284 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CONFIGuration:NUMMEAS? (Query Only) This query returns the maximum number of periodic measurements. Group Conﬁguration Syntax CONFIGuration:NUMMEAS? Related Commands (See page 2-36, Measurement Command Group.) Returns <NR1> CONFIGuration:REFS:NUMREFS? (Query Only) This query returns the number of reference waveforms. Group Conﬁguration Syntax...
Page 285 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Returns = 1 if the advanced RF feature is present. <NR1> = 0 if the advanced RF feature is not present. <NR1> CONFIGuration:RF:BANDWidth? (Query Only) This query returns the bandwidth, in Hz, for the RF channel(s). If there are no RF channels, the value returned is 0.
Page 286 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CONFIGuration:RF:NUMCHANnels? Related Commands (See page 2-47, RF Command Group .) Returns <NR1> CONFIGuration:ROSC? (Query Only) This query returns a boolean value to indicate whether the instrument has an external reference oscillator (ROSC) input. Group Conﬁguration Syntax CONFIGuration:ROSC?
Page 287 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:DDT? Examples might return indicating that the CURSOR:DDT? :CURSOR:DDT -166.6670 cursor dV/dt read out is -166.6670 CURSor:FUNCtion This command selects the cursor mode. In Waveform mode, the cursors are attached to the selected waveform; in Screen mode, cursors are attached to the display area .
Page 288 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:HBArs? Examples might return the horizontal CURSOR:HBARS? bar setting as :CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 320.0000E-03;POSITION2-320.0000E-03;UNITS BASE CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only) Returns the vertical difference between the two horizontal bar cursors. Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? Related Commands CURSor:HBArs:UNIts Returns A ﬂoating point value with an exponent.
Page 289 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the cursor position relative to <NR3> ground. Examples positions Cursor 1 of the horizontal CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 25.0E-3 cursors at 25 mV. might return CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2? :CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2 indicating that Cursor 2 of the horizontal bar cursors is at -64 mV. -64.0000E-03 CURSor:HBArs:UNIts This command speciﬁes the units for the horizontal bar cursors.
Page 290 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets H Bar measurement scale so that half the screen major divisions HALFgrat (ﬁve on the MSO/DPO4000B and MDO4000/B/C, four on the MDO3000) is 100%, where 0% is -2.5 divisions and 100% is +2.5 divisions from the center horizontal graticule.
Page 291 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CURSor:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4|MATH |BUS1|BUS2|BUS3|BUS4|D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10 |D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|RF_AMPlitude|RF_FREQuency|RF_PHASe|AUTO} CURSor:SOUrce? Related Commands SELect:CONTROl, CURSor:MODe, CURSor:FUNCtion Arguments – speciﬁes one of the analog waveforms as the cursor source. CH1-4 – speciﬁes one of the reference waveforms as the cursor source. REF1-4 –...
Page 292 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return the following vertical bar settings CURSOR:VBARS? 1.0000E-06;POSITION2 :CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 9.0000E-06 CURSor:VBArs:ALTERNATE<x>? (Query Only) Returns the alternate readout for the waveform (Vbar) cursors speciﬁed by <x>. This alternate readout is in effect when the selected waveform is a bus or digital channel.
Page 293 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:VBArs:HPOS<x>? Related Commands CURSor:VBArs:UNIts Arguments speciﬁes the cursor. Valid values are 1 and 2. <x> Returns is a ﬂoating point number that indicates the value of one of the ticks. The <NR3> units are the same as the selected waveform.
Page 294 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order this command might return CURSor:VBArs:POSITION1? indicating that the :CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1 1.0000E-06 cursor1 vertical bar is positioned at 1 μs. CURSor:VBArs:UNIts This command speciﬁes the units for the vertical bar cursors. Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:VBArs:UNIts {SEConds|HERtz|DEGrees|PERcent} CURSor:VBArs:UNIts? Arguments sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the time domain (seconds).
Page 295 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the V Bar measurement scale so that 0% is the current position of CURrent the left-most V Bar cursor and 100% is the current position of the right-most V Bar cursor. resets the ratio range to the default positions on the screen, half HALFgrat of the number of horizontal divisions (ﬁve on the MSO/DPO4000B and MDO4000/B/C), from 25% to 75% of the screen.
Page 296 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:POSITION<x>? (Query Only) Returns the polar radius for the speciﬁed cursor, where x can be either 1 or 2. Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:POSITION<x>? CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:UNIts? (Query Only) Returns the polar radius units. Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:XY:POLar:RADIUS:UNIts? CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:DELta? (Query Only) Returns the XY cursor polar angle delta.
Page 297 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:XY:POLar:THETA:UNIts? CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:DELta? (Query Only) Returns the difference between the cursors X position and cursor Y position. The ΔX × ΔY value is calculated as (X2 - X1) × (Y2 - Y1). Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:XY:PRODUCT:DELta?
Page 298 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CURSor:XY:RATIO:DELta? CURSor:XY:RATIO:POSITION<x>? (Query Only) Returns the X (horizontal) or Y (vertical) position for the speciﬁed cursor, which can be 1 (X) or 2 (Y). The ratio is calculated as Position 1 = (Y1/X1); Position 2 = (Y2/X2).
Page 299 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:DELta? (Query Only) Returns the cursor X delta value in rectangular coordinates. Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:DELta? CURSor:XY:RECTangular:X:POSITION<x> This command speciﬁes the X rectangular coordinate for cursor 1 or cursor 2. The cursor is speciﬁed by x and can be either 1 or 2. Group Cursor Syntax...
Page 300 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:POSITION<x> This command speciﬁes the Y rectangular coordinate for cursor 1 or cursor 2. The cursor is speciﬁed by x and can be either 1 or 2. Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:POSITION<x> <NR3> CURSor:XY:RECTangular:Y:POSITION<x>? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the coordinate in volts. <NR3>...
Page 301 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order where: N is a single decimal or hexadecimal digit indicating the number of digits to follow. <N-digits> are the decimal digits representing the number of bytes in the data that immediately follows this binary block header. The Waveform Transfer command group text contains more comprehensive information.
Page 302 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre? ACQuire:MODe Arguments is the waveform data in binary format. The waveform is formatted as <Block> follows: <IEEE488.2 binary block header><data><newline> <IEEE488.2 binary block> is the header, which is deﬁned as #N<N-digits> N is a single decimal or hexadecimal digit indicating the number of digits to follow.
Page 303 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. Curve data is transferred from the oscilloscope asynchronously, depending on the length of the curve record. Such transfers may require several seconds to complete. During this period, the oscilloscope will not respond to the user controls.
Page 304 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order :DATa:SOUrce CH1 :DATa:DESTination REF1 :WFMInpre:BYT_NR 1 :WFMInpre:BIT_NR 8 :WFMInpre:ENCDG BINARY :WFMInpre:BN_FMT RI :WFMInpre:BYT_OR MSB :WFMInpre:PT_FMT Y :WFMOutpre:BYT_NR 1 :WFMOutpre:BIT_NR 8 :WFMOutpre:ENCDG BINARY :WFMOutpre:BN_FMT RI :WFMOutpre:BYT_OR MSB :WFMOutpre:NR_PT <current acquisition record length> :WFMOutpre:PT_FMT Y sets DATa:STARt DATa:STOP to match the current waveform cursor SNAp...
Page 305 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands CURVe Arguments is the reference location where the waveform will be stored. REF<x> Examples might return indicating that DATA:DESTINATION? :DATA:DESTINATION REF3 reference 3 is the currently selected reference memory location for incoming waveform data. indicates that incoming waveform DATA:DESTINATION REF1 data be stored in reference 1.
Page 306: Table 2-53: Data And Wfmoutpre Parameter Settings
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order you must use one of the binary encodings. If ASCII is the value, then BN_Fmt are ignored. BYT_Or speciﬁes the encoding which results in the fastest waveform FAStest data transfer rate. This sets the following: WFMOutpre:ENCdg BINary, WFMOutpre:BIN_Fmt RI WFMOutpre:BYT_Or MSB.
Page 307 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2-53: DATa and WFMOutpre Parameter Settings (cont.) WFMOutpre Settings DATa:ENCdg Setting :ENCdg :BN_Fmt :BYT_Or :BYT_NR RIBinary RPBinary SRIbinary SRPbinary FPbinary SFPbinary Examples might return for the format of the DATA:ENCDG? :DATa:ENCDG SRPBINARY outgoing waveform data. sets the data encoding format to be a positive integer DATA:ENCDG RPBinary where the most signiﬁcant byte is transferred ﬁrst.
Page 308 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes that the Math waveform data will be transferred from the MATH oscilloscope to the controller. speciﬁes which Reference waveform data will be transferred from REF1–REF4 the oscilloscope to the controller. speciﬁes which digital channel waveform data will be transferred from D0–D15 the oscilloscope to the controller.
Page 309 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATa, DATa:STOP, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? Arguments is the ﬁrst data point that will be transferred, which ranges from 1 to the <NR1> record length. Data will be transferred from or the record <NR1> DATa:STOP length, whichever is less. If is greater than the record length, the last <NR1>...
Page 310 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (See page 2-95, Waveform Transfer Command Group.) Group Waveform Transfer Syntax DATa:STOP <NR1> DATa:STOP? Related Commands CURVe, DATa, DATa:STARt, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? Arguments is the last data point that will be transferred, which ranges from 1 to <NR1>...
Page 311 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. This command is equivalent to the command. WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr (See page 2-95, Waveform Transfer Command Group.) Group Waveform Transfer Syntax DATa:WIDth <NR1> DATa:WIDth? Related Commands CURVe?, DATa:SOUrce, DATa:DESTination, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr Arguments is an integer that indicates the number of bytes per point for the outgoing <NR1>...
Page 312 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a date in the form "yyyy-mm-dd" where yyyy refers to a four-digit <QString> year number, mm refers to a two-digit month number from 01 to 12, and dd refers to a two-digit day number in the month. Examples speciﬁes that the date is set to January 24, 2006.
Page 313 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Status and Error Syntax DESE <NR1> DESE? Related Commands *CLS, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB? Arguments sets the binary bits of the DESER according to this value, which ranges <NR1> from 1 through 255. For example, DESE 209 sets the DESER to the binary value 11010001 (that is, the most signiﬁcant bit in the register is set to 1, the next most signiﬁcant bit to 1, the next bit to 0, etc.).
Page 314 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DESkew:DISPlay This command speciﬁes the state of the deskew table display. Group Vertical Syntax DESkew:DISPlay {OFF|ON|0|1} DESkew:DISPlay? Arguments or 0 turns off the deskew table display. or 1 turns on the deskew table display. DIAg:LOOP:OPTion Sets the self-test loop option.
Page 315 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes <NR1> DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes? Arguments is the number of self-test loops. <NR1> Examples sets the self-test loop to run three times. DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES 3 might return DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES? :DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES 5 indicating the self-test loop is set to run ﬁve times. DIAg:LOOP:STOP (No Query Form) Stops the self-test at the end of the current loop.
Page 316 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return DIAG:RESULT:FLAG? DIAG:RESULT:FLAG PASS DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? (Query Only) Returns the internal results log from the last self-test sequence execution. The list contains all modules and module interfaces that were tested along with the pass/fail status of each. Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax...
Page 317 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order runs just the IO board diagnostic group. runs just the ROM board diagnostic group. runs just the acquisition system diagnostic group. runs just the RF system diagnostic group (MDO models only). runs just the AFG system diagnostic group (models with AFG hardware). DIAg:SELect:<function>...
Page 318 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DIAg:STATE (No Query Form) This command starts or stops the oscilloscope diagnostic self-tests. Which self-test is run is speciﬁed by the DIAg:SELect: DIAg:SELect:<function> commands. Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax DIAg:STATE {EXECute|ABORt} Arguments starts diagnostics. EXECute stops diagnostics at the end of the current loop.
Page 319 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments enables the display of date and time. disables the display of date and time. = 0 disables the display of date and time; any other value enables the <NR1> display of date and time. Examples enables display of date and time.
Page 320 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax DISplay:DIGital:ACTIVity {0|1|OFF|ON} DISplay:DIGital:ACTIVity? Arguments turns on the digital channel activity monitor display. turns it off. Examples turns on the digital channel activity monitor. DIS:DIG:ACTIV ON DISplay:DIGital:HEIght This command speciﬁes the number of available digital waveform position slots. NOTE.
Page 321 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes a frame and grid only. GRId speciﬁes a solid graticule. SOLid Examples sets the graticule type to display the frame only. DISPLAY:GRATICULE FRAme might return indicating DISPLAY:GRATICULE? :DISPLAY:GRATICULE FULL that all graticule elements are selected. DISplay:INTENSITy? (Query Only) Returns the display intensity settings.
Page 322 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:ENAble {OFF|ON|0|1} DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:ENAble? Arguments or 0 turns off the display auto-dim feature. or 1 turns it on. DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:TIMe Sets or returns the amount of time, in minutes, to wait for no UI activity before automatically dimming the display.
Page 323 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Display Syntax DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform <NR1> DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform? Arguments is the waveform intensity and ranges from 1 to 100 percent. <NR1> Examples might return DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM? DISPLAY:INTEnsITY:WAVEFORM 60 as the intensity of the waveforms. DISplay:PERSistence This command speciﬁes the display persistence for analog waveforms. This affects the display only.
Page 324 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples speciﬁes that the waveform points are displayed DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE 3 fading for 3 seconds before they completely disappear. DISplay:STYle:DOTsonly This command turns on or off the dots-only mode for the waveforms displayed in the time domain. Group Display Syntax...
Page 325 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax DISplay:XY {OFF|TRIGgered} DISplay:XY? Related Commands commands. CURSOR:XY Arguments – The channels are displayed individually as a function of time. – The channels are displayed in “X-Y” pairs with CH1 being TRIGgered displayed as a function of CH2, and so on. Examples speciﬁes to use the XY display mode.
Page 326 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands commands. CURSOR:XY DVM:DISPLAYSTYle Arguments turns on simultaneous display of the XY and YT waveforms when in TRIGgered XY display mode. turns simultaneous display off. Examples turns simultaneous display of the XY and YT waveforms DISplay:XY:WITHYT when in TRIGgered XY display mode DVM (No Query Form)
Page 327 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments turns on the auto range state for the Digital Voltmeter. turns it off. Examples turns on the auto range state for the Digital Voltmeter. DVM:AUTOR ON DVM:DISPLAYSTYle Sets (or queries) the display style for the Digital Voltmeter. Conditions MDO3000 and MDO4000C only;...
Page 328 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:AVErage? (Query Only) Returns the average readout value for the Digital Voltmeter function over the history period. Any qualiﬁer, such as "Measurement warning, Clipping positive", is automatically set as an error event. Conditions MDO3000 and MDO4000C only; requires DVM option key to be installed. Group Syntax DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:AVErage?
Page 329 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions MDO3000 and MDO4000C only; requires DVM option key to be installed. Group Syntax DVM:MEASUrement:HIStory:MINImum? Examples might return 100.0000E+3, which represents the DVM:MEASU:HIS:MINI? minimum readout value for the DVM function over the history period. DVM:MEASUrement:INFMAXimum? (Query Only) Returns the maximum DVM readout value over the entire time that the DVM has been on since the last change using the DVM:MODe...
Page 330 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax DVM:MEASUrement:INFMINimum? Examples might return which represents the DVM:MEASU:INMIN? 100.0000E+3, minimum readout value of the DVM function over the entire time that the DVM has been on since the last change using the DVM:MODe DVM:SOUrce commands or DVM RESET...
Page 331 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order – displays the RMS value of the acquired data. ACDCRMS – displays the DC value of the acquired data. – displays the frequency counter measurement. FREQuency Examples sets the mode for the DVM to DC, which displays the DC value of DVM:MODE DC the acquired data.
Page 332 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order D<x>:LABel This command speciﬁes the waveform label for digital channel <x>, where x is the channel number. Conditions Requires an MSO or MDO4000/B/C model, or MDO3000 with option MDO3MSO installed. Group Vertical Syntax D<x>:LABel <Qstring> D<x>:LABel? Arguments is an alphanumeric string of text, enclosed in quotes, that contains the...
Page 333 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the position of the digital channel, <NR3> in slot units. Use the oscilloscope front-panel controls to place the channel; then query the channel to obtain an exact value for the position. D<x>:THReshold This command speciﬁes the logical threshold for the digital channel <x>, where x is the digital channel number D0 –...
Page 334 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax *ESE <NR1> *ESE? Related Commands *CLS, DESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB? Arguments speciﬁes the binary bits of the ESER according to this value, which ranges <NR1> from 0 through 255. The power-on default for the ESER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the ESER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle.
Page 335 128. Examples sets the EMAIL:SETUP:FROMADDRESS “george.wilcox@tektronix.com” sender’s email address to george.wilcox@tektronix.com. EMAIL:SETUp:HOSTALIASNAMe Sets (or queries) the email host alias name for the common server setup information that is shared between the Act on Event commands and the Hardcopy Email commands.
Page 336 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order EMAIL:SETUp:SMTPLOGIn Sets or returns the email SMTP server login ID for the common server setup information that is shared between the Act on Event commands and the Hardcopy Email commands. Group Email Syntax EMAIL:SETUp:SMTPLOGIn <QString> EMAIL:SETUp:SMTPLOGIn? Arguments Quoted string that represents the email SMTP server login ID.
Page 337 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Email Syntax EMAIL:SETUp:SMTPPort <NR1> EMAIL:SETUp:SMTPPort? Arguments Integer that represents the email SMTP server port number. Examples sets the email SMTP server port number to 19. EMAIL:SETUP:SMTPPORT 19 EMAIL:SETUp:SMTPServer Sets or returns the email SMTP server DNS name for the common server setup information that is shared between the Act on Event commands and the Hardcopy Email commands.
Page 338 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. Do not use DHCP/BOOTP searching if your oscilloscope has been assigned a static address on a network. If you set this command to ON, the DHCP/BOOTP search will delete or change your static IP address information. disables the oscilloscope to search the network for a DHCP or BOOTP server.
Page 339 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress? (Query Only) Returns the Ethernet address value assigned to the oscilloscope. This is assigned at the factory and can not be changed. Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress? Examples returns an Ethernet address such as ETHERNET:ENET:ADDRESS? 08:00:11:01:02:03 ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress This command speciﬁes the remote interface gateway IP address.
Page 340 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is an integer port number, enclosed in quotes. <QString> NOTE. Consider the following if you are using the e*Scope™ control software. If you don't enter a port address in the URL, then the value ETHERnet:HTTPPort must be set to "80", which is the default port for HTTP protocol.
Page 341 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:PASSWord:ESCOPEENABle, ETHERnet:PASSWord Arguments — turns off the LXI password feature. This is the default. 0, OFF — turns on the LXI password feature. 1, ON Examples turns on the LXI password ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:PASSWord:ENABle ON feature.
Page 342 Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 64 characters that speciﬁes the mDNS service name used for the LXI interface. Examples might return "Tektronix Oscilloscope ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:SERVICENAMe? MSO4104B 053CVV" ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:STATus? (Query Only) This query returns the LXI network status.
Page 343 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return FAULT, indicating the network is not ETHER:LXI:LAN:STAT? visible, or the network settings are incorrect. ETHERnet:NAME This command speciﬁes the network name assigned to the oscilloscope. Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet:NAME <QString> ETHERnet:NAME? Arguments is the network name assigned to the oscilloscope, enclosed in quotes.
Page 344 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples speciﬁes to conﬁgure the Ethernet ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig MANual settings manually. might return AUTOMATIC, indicating the ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig? settings are being conﬁgured automatically. ETHERnet:PASSWord This command speciﬁes the HTTP Ethernet access password. If a password is set, the user must enter the password before the user's Web browser can access the oscilloscope.
Page 345 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ETHERnet:PING:STATus? (Query Only) Returns the results from sending the ETHERnet:PING command to ping the gateway IP address. Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet:PING:STATus? Returns is returned if the computer at the gateway IP address answers. is returned if the computer at the gateway IP address does not NORESPOnsE answer.
Page 346 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order EVENT? (Query Only) Returns an event code from the Event Queue that provides information about the results of the last *ESR? read. EVENT? also removes the returned value from the Event Queue. Group Status and Error Syntax EVENT? Related Commands...
Page 347 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order EVQty? (Query Only) Returns the number of event codes in the Event Queue. This is useful when using ALLEv? query, which returns the exact number of events. Group Status and Error Syntax EVQty? Related Commands ALLEv?, EVENT?, EVMsg? Examples...
Page 348 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Save and Recall Syntax FACtory Related Commands *PSC, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp Arguments None Examples resets the oscilloscope to its factory default settings. FACTORY FILESystem? (Query Only) Returns the directory listing of the current working directory and the number of bytes of free space available.
Page 349 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FILESystem:COPy (No Query Form) This command copies a named ﬁle to a new ﬁle. The new ﬁle may be in a totally separate directory than the old ﬁle. You can only copy one ﬁle at a time using this command.
Page 350 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax FILESystem:CWD {<new working directory path>} Arguments is a quoted string that deﬁnes the current <new working directory path> working; a directory name can be up to 128 characters. Examples sets the current working directory FILESYSTEM:CWD "E:/TekScope/images"...
Page 351 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group File System Syntax FILESystem:DIR? Related Commands FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:MKDir Arguments None Returns returns a list of ﬁles and directories in the current working FILESystem:DIR? directory. Examples might return FILESYSTEM:DIR? :FILESYSTEM:DIR "tek00000.png","my_CAN_setup.set","savedWfm1.isf","myImages" FILESystem:FORMat (No Query Form) Formats a mass storage device.
Page 352 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group File System Syntax FILESystem:FREESpace? Related Commands FILESystem:FREESpace?, FILESystem:CWD FILESystem:LDIR? (Query Only) Returns a semicolon separated list of every ﬁle and directory in the folder referred to by the FILESystem:CWD command. This is different than the FILESystem:DIR? query in that it provides a long output format with the ﬁle size, type, and modiﬁcation date/time.
Page 353 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:DIR?, FILESystem:MOUNT:DRIve Arguments is a quoted string that speciﬁes the directory to create <directory path> Examples creates the directory named FILESYSTEM:MKDIR "E:/NewDirectory" NewDirectory at the root of the D drive. These two commands create the directory MyNewSubDirectory within the existing directory MyDirectory at the root of the D drive: FILESYSTEM:CWD "E:/MyDirectory";...
Page 354 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax FILESystem:MOUNT:DRIve <Qstring> Related Commands FILESystem:MOUNT:LIST?, FILESystem:UNMOUNT:DRIve Arguments Qstring is a semicolon separated list of ﬁelds described as follows: Drive Name: The drive name to use, which should be a case insensitive single letter followed by a colon. The drive name must be a letter between 'I' and 'Z', inclusive.
Page 355 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax FILESystem:MOUNT:LIST? Related Commands FILESystem:UNMOUNT:DRIve, FILESystem:MOUNT:DRIve Examples might return FILESystem:MOUNT:LIST? "X:;network.xyz.com;/net/users/mike/home;NFS,:;winnet.xyz.com;\net \users\fred\home;CIFS" FILESystem:READFile (No Query Form) Writes the contents of the speciﬁed ﬁle to the speciﬁed interface. If the speciﬁed ﬁle does not exist or is not readable, an appropriate error event is posted. Group File System Syntax...
Page 356 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a quoted string that deﬁnes the ﬁle name and path. If the ﬁle <old file path> path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the ﬁle name. is a quoted string that deﬁnes the ﬁle name and path. If the ﬁle <new file path>...
Page 357 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments QString is a quoted string that speciﬁes which network drive to un-mount. Examples speciﬁes to un-mount network drive I:. FILES:UNMOUNT:DRIVE "I:" FILESystem:WRITEFile (No Query Form) Writes the speciﬁed block data to a ﬁle in the oscilloscope current working directory.
Page 358: Table 2-54: Fpanel:press Arguments
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments — currently this is the only button supported by this command. If the CURsor hold time is not speciﬁed, it defaults to 1200 milliseconds. The range is 0 to 10,000 milliseconds. The system expects a minimum of 1 second to recognize a hold.
Page 359 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2-54: FPAnel:PRESS arguments (cont.) Argument Description D15D0 D15–D0 button DEFaultsetup Default Setup button FINe Fine button FORCetrig Force Trig button HARDcopy Print button HORZPos Push to center (MDO3000 and MDO4000C only) INTensity Intensity button MAGnify Magnify (zoom) button (not the zoom/pan knob)
Page 360: Table 2-55: Fpanel:turn Arguments
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FPAnel:TURN (No Query Form) Simulates the action of turning a speciﬁed front-panel control knob. When the front panel is locked, the front-panel button and multipurpose knob operations are suspended. The FPAnel:PRESS commands FPAnel:TURN will also not work, and, they will not generate an error. You can work around this by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands, instead of the front-panel commands.
Page 361 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order GPIBUsb:ADDress? (Query Only) Returns the current GPIB address setting for a connected TEK-USB-488 adaptor module. Group Miscellaneous Syntax GPIBUsb:ADDress? GPIBUsb:ID? (Query Only) Returns the identiﬁcation string of the connected TEK-USB-488 adaptor module and ﬁrmware version. If a TEK-USB-488.2 module is not connected, the system returns “Not detected”.
Page 362 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. The Hardcopy command with no arguments is equivalent to pressing the “HardCopy” button on the front panel, when the data is sent to the printer. As there is no front panel equivalent of the HARDCOPY START, you can choose to save the images to a different location using the “SAVE”...
Page 363 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples will cause subsequent hard copy output to display the HARDCOPY:INKSAVER ON screen on a white background. HARDCopy:LAYout This command speciﬁes the page orientation for hard copy. If you set the layout to LANdscape, the printer will print hard copies in landscape mode where the long edge of the screen will print to the long edge of the sheet of paper.
Page 364 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HARDCopy:PRINTer:ADD (No Query Form) This command is used to add a network or email printer to the list of available printers. Adding a network printer requires 3 arguments, but only one of server name or server IP address should be speciﬁed. An empty string can be used for blank arguments.
Page 365 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Email printer: To add an email printer at labprn3@example.com: HARDCopy:PRINTer:ADD "labprn3@example.com" HARDCopy:PRINTer:DELete (No Query Form) Removes a network printer from the list of available printers. The printer name is case sensitive. Group Hard Copy Syntax HARDCopy:PRINTer:DELete <name>...
Page 366 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Hard Copy Syntax HARDCopy:PRINTer:REName <name>,<new_name>,<new_server>,<new_address> Arguments Network printer: is the name of the printer to be renamed (deleted). <index> | <name> is the new name for this printer. <new_printer_name> is the new print server for this printer. <new_server_name>...
Page 367 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HARDCopy:PRINTer:REName "labprn1", "labprn2", "newserver.example.com", "" HARDCopy:PRINTer:REName 1, "labprn2", "newserver.example.com", "" Email printer: If the ﬁrst entry on the printer list is for a network printer called 'labprn1', either of the following commands could be used to replace this printer with an email printer 'emailPrinter@example.com': HARDCopy:PRINTer:REName "labprn1", "labprn3@example.com"...
Page 368 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This causes the oscilloscope to omit headers on query responses, so that only the argument is returned. sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This causes the oscilloscope to include headers on applicable query responses.
Page 369 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands HIStogram:BOXPcnt Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the left position of the histogram <NR3> box in source waveform horizontal units. speciﬁes the top position of the histogram box in source waveform vertical <NR3>...
Page 370 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes the bottom position of the histogram box in percentage <NR3> coordinates. The default value is 20% Examples sets the left boundary of the HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT 30.0,25.0,70.0,75.0 histogram box to 30% of the graticule (3 divisions from the left edge); the top boundary to 25% of the graticule (0.25 ×...
Page 371 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 0, as they represent digitizing levels that fall above and beneath the waveform graticule, respectively. For horizontal histograms, this query returns 1000 values, representing the number of times the histogram source waveform samples were coincident with each horizontal pixel column.
Page 372 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Histogram Syntax HIStogram:DISplay {OFF|LOG|LINEAr} HIStogram:DISplay? Related Commands HIStogram:MODe Arguments sets the histogram display to logarithmic scaling <LOG> sets the histogram display to linear scaling. This is the default setting. <LINEAr> Examples sets the histogram scaling to be the log count of each HISTOGRAM:DISPLAYLOG histogram bin.
Page 373 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HIStogram:MODe This command selects the type of histogram to create or disables the histogram display. The query form either returns the current histogram type or that the histogram display is disabled. Group Histogram Syntax HIStogram:MODe {HORizontal|VERTical|OFF} HIStogram:MODe? Related Commands HIStogram:DISplay...
Page 374 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order selects the math waveform as the source for the histogram. MATH selects a reference waveform as the source for the histogram. The x REF<1–4> variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4. Examples enables the Channel 1 waveform to be compared HISTOGRAM:SOURCE CH1...
Page 375 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax HORizontal? Examples might return the following horizontal settings HORIZONTAL? :HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE 1;TIME 0.0000;:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE 20.0000E-9;SAMPLERATE 5.0000E+9;UNITS "s";UNITS:STRING "s";:HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE 5.0000E+9;RECORDLENGTH 1000000 HORizontal:DELay:MODe This command speciﬁes the horizontal delay mode. Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:DELay:MODe {OFF|ON|<NR1>} HORizontal:DELay:MODe? Related Commands HORizontal:POSition Arguments sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off.
Page 376 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:DELay:TIMe <NR3> HORizontal:DELay:TIMe? Related Commands HORizontal:POSition Arguments is the delay in seconds. Examples sets the delay of acquisition data so that the HORizontal:DELay:TIME 0.3 resulting waveform is centered 300 ms after the trigger occurs. HORizontal:DIGital:RECOrdlength:MAGnivu? (Query Only) Returns the record length of the MagniVu digital acquisition.
Page 377 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HORizontal:DIGital:SAMPLERate:MAIn? (Query Only) Returns the sample rate of the main digital acquisition. Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:DIGital:SAMPLERate:MAIn? HORizontal:POSition This command speciﬁes the horizontal position, in percent, that is used when delay if off. If Horizontal Delay Mode is turned off, this command is equivalent to adjusting the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel.
Page 378 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Returns = 1 if the display system is in the preview state. <NR1> = 0 if the display system is not in the preview state. <NR1> HORizontal:RECOrdlength Sets the horizontal record length. The query form of this command returns the current horizontal record length.
Page 379 However, it does not include the instrument serial number. The format of the returned string is an extension of that speciﬁed in Tektronix Codes and Formats with the addition of the application information (and is not dependent upon :HEADer or :VERBose settings): ID TEK/<model>,CF:91.1CT FV:v<ﬁrmware version>...
Page 380 Syntax *IDN? Related Commands Examples might return *IDN? :TEKTRONIX,DPO4034B,SN123456789,CF:91.1CT indicating the oscilloscope model number, serial number, FV:v1.00000 conﬁgured number, and ﬁrmware version number. LANGuage This command speciﬁes the user interface display language. This command only affects the oscilloscope displayed language. Remote commands and their responses are always in English.
Page 381 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LOCk Enables or disables all front-panel buttons and knobs. There is no front panel equivalent. When the front panel is locked, neither the FPAnel:PRESS nor the FPAnel:TURN commands will work. They will not generate an error event either. You can work around this by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands, instead of the front-panel commands.
Page 382 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return a long response, part of which could be as follows: *LRN? :ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUnsTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV INFINITE;NUMAVG 16;SAMPLINGMODE RT;:HEADER 1;:LOCK NONE;:LANGUAGE ENGLISH;:VERBOSE 1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE NORMAL;:DISPLAY:STYLE:DOTSONLY 0;:DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE 0.0000;CLOCK 1;GRATICULE FULL;INTEnsITY:WAVEFORM 30;GRATICULE 75;BACKLIGHT HIGH;:HARDCOPY :INKSAVER OFF;LAYOUT LANDSCAPE;PREVIEW 0;:SAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT BMP;:SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT INTERNAL;:SAVE:ASSIGN:TYPE SETUP;:TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LE VEL 20.0000E-3;LEVEL:CH1...
Page 383 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments moves to the next reference mark on the right. NEXT moves to the next reference mark on the left. PREVious MARK:CREATE (No Query Form) Creates a mark on a speciﬁed waveform or all waveforms in a column. Group Mark Syntax...
Page 384 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments deletes the mark on a channel waveform, where <x> is the channel number. CH<x> deletes the mark on the math waveform. MATH deletes the mark on a bus waveform, where <x> B<x> deletes the mark on a reference waveform, where <x> is the reference REF<x>...
Page 385 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Mark Syntax MARK:SELected:END? MARK:SELected:FOCUS? (Query Only) Returns the focus of the selected mark, 0 to 100% of the waveform. Group Mark Syntax MARK:SELected:FOCUS? MARK:SELected:MARKSINCOLumn? (Query Only) Returns the number of marks in the current zoom pixel column. Group Mark Syntax...
Page 386 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Mark Syntax MARK:SELected:SOURCe? MARK:SELected:STARt? (Query Only) Returns the starting point of the selected mark, 0 to 100% of the waveform. Group Mark Syntax MARK:SELected:STARt? MARK:SELected:STATE? (Query Only) Returns the on or off state of the selected mark. The selected mark is at or near the center of the screen.
Page 387 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MARK:TOTal? MARK:USERLIST The command creates a single user mark on a waveform in the time domain. The arguments consist of an enumeration specifying the source waveform, followed by 7 time mark parameters. You can create up to 1,024 marks. To save all the marks to memory, use the command MARK:SAVEALL TOUSER The query form retrieves a list of all user marks, separated by a semicolon.
Page 388 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order – RF time domain traces RF_AMPlitude|RF_FREQuency|RF_PHASe (MDO4000/B/C models only.) The next 7 <NR3> arguments are time mark parameters as follows: Start – start value in percentage of record End – end value in percentage of record Focus –...
Page 389 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only. Group Syntax MARKER:MANual {OFF|ON|0|1} MARKER:MANual? Related Commands MARKER:M<x>:AMPLitude:ABSolute?, MARKER:M<x>:AMPLitude: DELTa?, MARKER:M<x>:FREQuency:DELTa?, MARKER:M<x>:FREQuency: ABSolute Arguments or 0 turns the manual markers off. or 1 turns the manual markers on. Examples turns on the manual markers.
Page 390 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MARKER:M<x>:AMPLitude:DELTa? (Query Only) This query returns the delta amplitude (vertical) value of either of the two manual markers that are available for frequency domain traces, in relation to the Reference Marker. M<x> can be either M1, which speciﬁes manual marker a, or M2, which speciﬁes manual marker b.
Page 391 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands MARKER:MANual, MARKER:M<x>:AMPLitude:ABSolute?, MARKER:M<x>:AMPLitude:DELTa?, MARKER:M<x>:FREQuency:DELTa? Arguments is a ﬂoating point value that indicates the actual frequency of either of the <NR3> two manual markers. Examples sets the absolute frequency MARKER:M1:FREQuency:ABSolute 1.50E+9 value of manual marker a to 1.5 GHz. might return 1.50E+9, indicating that the MARKER:M2:FREQuency:ABSolute? absolute frequency value of manual marker b has been set to 1.5 GHz.
Page 392 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MARKER:M<x>:NOISEDensity? (Query Only) This command returns the noise density of the RF_NORMal trace at the speciﬁed marker position in <RF Units>/Hz units, where <RF Units> are the units speciﬁed by the command RF:UNIts. Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only. Group Syntax MARKER:M<x>:NOISEDensity?
Page 393 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MARKER:PEAK:EXCURsion This command speciﬁes the peak excursion value, in dB, for the frequency domain trace automatic peak markers. Peak excursion refers to how far an RF signal needs to fall in amplitude between marked peaks, in order to be considered another valid peak. If the peak excursion value is low, more peaks will tend to qualify as valid peaks and have associated markers.
Page 394 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax MARKER:PEAK:MAXimum <NR1> MARKER:PEAK:MAXimum? Related Commands MARKER:PEAK:STATE, MARKER:PEAK:EXCURsion, MARKER:PEAK: THReshold, MARKER:TYPe, Arguments is an integer that represents the maximum number of peaks that could <NR1> have automatic markers. Examples sets the maximum number of peaks that could have MARKER:PEAK:MAXimum 3 automatic markers to 3.
Page 395 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples turns the automatic peak markers on. MARKER:PEAK:STATE 1 might return 0, indicating that automatic peak markers MARKER:PEAK:STATE? are turned off. MARKER:PEAK:THReshold This command speciﬁes the threshold value of the automatic peak markers command to specify available for frequency domain traces.
Page 396 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order of the screen. This applies when markers are turned on (using the command MARKER:PEAK:STATE or MARKER:MANual). This is equivalent to the 'R' to Center side menu button in the front panel Markers menu. Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only. Group Syntax MARKER:REFERence CENTER...
Page 397 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order number that appears on the display next to the red R inside a triangle when markers areon. If all markers are off, the value returned will be the last value displayed. Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only. Group Syntax MARKER:REFERence:FREQuency?
Page 398 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:COPy:SOUrce This command speciﬁes the mask that is to be copied to a user-deﬁned custom mask. The speciﬁed mask is not copied until after the MASK:COPy:USER command is executed. Note that in addition to a standard mask, LIMit, USER can also be speciﬁed.
Page 399 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order – DS4NA Max Output 138.26 Mb/s DS4XNA – STS–1 Pulse 51.84 Mb/s STS1Pulse – STS–1 Eye 51.84 Mb/s STS1Eye – STS–3 155.52 Mb/s STS3 – STS–3 Max Output 155.52 Mb/s STSX3 ITU-T: – Clock Interface Coaxial Pair 2.048 Mb/s CLOCKCoax –...
Page 400 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples E1Coax speciﬁes that the source for a user-deﬁned custom MASK:COPy:SOUrce mask (to be created with the command ) is to be a standard MASK:COPy:USER ITU-T E1 Coaxial Pair mask. might return NONE, indicating that no source has been MASK:COPy:SOUrce? speciﬁed.
Page 401 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Mask Syntax MASK:COUNt RESET Related Commands MASK:COUNt:HITS? MASK:COUNt:SEG<x>:HITS? MASK:COUNt:FAILURES? Examples resets to zero the number of hits and failures for all mask MASK:COUNt RESET segments. MASK:COUNt:FAILURES? (Query Only) This query returns the number of pass/fail mask tests that have failed. A series of examples showing how to use mask commands for typical tasks is included in an appendix.
Page 402 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order A series of examples showing how to use mask commands for typical tasks is included in an appendix. (See page E-1, Mask/Limit Command Sequence Examples.) Conditions This command requires a DPO4LMT application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3LMT application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 403 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Returns Integer, representing the number of hits in the mask segment. Examples might return showing MASK:COUNT:SEG1:HITS? MASK:COUNT:SEG1:HITS 0, that there have been no hits to mask segment 1. MASK:COUNt:TESTS? (Query Only) This query returns the number of pass/fail mask tests that have occurred. A series of examples showing how to use mask commands for typical tasks is included in an appendix.
Page 404 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Mask Syntax MASK:COUNt:VIOLATIONS? Related Commands MASK:COUNt:TESTS?, MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS? Returns <NR1> Examples might return: 250 showing that 250 test violations MASK:COUNT:VIOLATIONS? have occurred. MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS? (Query Only) This query returns the number of waveforms that have been acquired and processed during pass/fail mask testing.
Page 405 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:CUSTom (No Query Form) This command initializes a custom mask using a default triangle segment 1 mask ), or copies the currently active mask to the user-deﬁned :MASK:CUSTOM INIT custom mask ( :MASK:CUSTOM COPYActive NOTE. When you create a custom mask, the horizontal position setting is converted from percent to time, and sets the trigtosamp value.
Page 406 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order A series of examples showing how to use mask commands for typical tasks is included in an appendix. (See page E-1, Mask/Limit Command Sequence Examples.) Conditions This command requires a DPO4LMT application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3LMT application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 407 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MASK:LOCk {ON|OFF|<NR1>} MASK:LOCk? Related Commands MASK:SOUrce Arguments turns on this feature, so that the mask is locked to the waveform. turns off this feature. turns off this feature. Any other value turns it on. <NR1>...
Page 408 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:SOUrce This command speciﬁes the mask source waveform to be used during pass/fail mask testing. Must be one of CH1 through CH4. A series of examples showing how to use mask commands for typical tasks is included in an appendix.
Page 409 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MASK:STANdard {DS1|DS1A|DS1C|DS2|DS3|DS4NA|DS4XNA|STS1Pulse|STS1Eye|STS3 |STSX3|CLOCKCoax|CLOCKSymmetrical|DSOContra|DSODouble |DSOSingle|DSOTiming|G703DS1|DS1Rate|DS2RATECoax |DS2RATESymmetrical|G703DS3|DS3Rate|E1Coax|E1Symmetrical |E2|E3|HST1|HST2|HST3|HST4|HST5 |HST6|NONe |USER|LIMit} MASK:STANdard? Arguments ANSI T1.102: – DS1 1.544 Mb/s – DS1A 2.048 Mb/s DS1A – DS1C 3.152 Mb/s DS1C – DS2 6.312 Mb/s – DS3 44.736 Mb/s –...
Page 410 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order – E1 Coaxial Pair 2.048 Mb/s E1Coax – E1 Symmetric Pair 2.048 Mb/s E1Symmetrical – E2 8.448 Mb/s – E3 34.368 Mb/s USB: – HS:T1 480 Mb/s HST1 – HS:T1 480 Mb/s HST2 – HS:T1 480 Mb/s HST3 –...
Page 411 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SAVEWFM, MASK:TESt:SAVEIMAGE, MASK:TESt:AUXout:FAILure, MASK:TESt:HARDCopy, or MASK:TESt:SRQ:FAILure. A series of examples showing how to use mask commands for typical tasks is included in an appendix. (See page E-1, Mask/Limit Command Sequence Examples.) Conditions This command requires a DPO4LMT application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3LMT application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 412 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order A series of examples showing how to use mask commands for typical tasks is included in an appendix. (See page E-1, Mask/Limit Command Sequence Examples.) NOTE. To ensure that Mask commands are enabled, use the command APPLication:TYPe LIMITMask.
Page 413 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MASK:TEMPLate:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4} MASK:TEMPLate:SOUrce? Related Commands MASK:TEMPLate:CREATEmask, MASK:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal, MASK:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical, SAVe:MASK MASK:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal This command speciﬁes the horizontal limit (tolerance) for a template mask to be used for limit testing. This indicates how far horizontally from the template source to create the mask.
Page 414 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order :MASK:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal 0.4 :MASK:TEMPLate:CREATEmask Notice that the horizontal gap in the mask is twice as tall. MASK:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical This command speciﬁes the vertical limit (tolerance) for a template mask to be used for limit testing. This indicates how far vertically from the template source to create the mask.
Page 415 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:TESt:AUXout:COMPLetion This command will cause the instrument to send a TTL signal to the AUX:out port whenever a pass/fail mask test completes. A series of examples showing how to use mask commands for typical tasks is included in an appendix.
Page 416 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4LMT application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3LMT application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Mask Syntax MASK:TESt:AUXout:FAILure {ON|OFF|<NR1>} MASK:TESt:AUXout:FAILure? Related Commands MASK:TESt:STATE, MASK:TESt:COMPLetion:CRITerion, MASK:TESt:AUXout:COMPLetion Arguments turns on this feature, so that a signal is sent to the AUX:out port whenever a mask test status changes to ‘failing’.
Page 417 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands MASK:TESt:STATE, MASK:TESt:WAVEform, MASK:TESt:TIME, MASK:TESt:THReshold Arguments speciﬁes that the test is to be considered complete when a speciﬁed WAVEform number of waveforms has been tested. (The number of waveforms is speciﬁed using MASK:TEST:WAVEform (<NR1>|INFInite)) speciﬁes that the test is to be considered complete when a speciﬁed amount TIMe of time has elapsed.
Page 418 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4LMT application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3LMT application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Mask Syntax MASK:TESt:DELay <NR3> MASK:TESt:DELay? Related Commands MASK:TESt:STATE, MASK:TESt:TIME Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the amount of time in seconds, to <NR3>...
Page 419 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments turns on this feature, so that the instrument will generate a screen hard copy to the default printer upon failure. turns off this feature. = 0 turns off this feature; any other value turns it on. <NR1>...
Page 420 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:TESt:SAVEIMAGE This command causes the instrument to copy the screen image to a ﬁle on a USB mass storage device or a mounted network drive if a pass/fail mask test fails. See the command FILESystem:MKDir and other File System commands for more information on saving to a ﬁle.
Page 421 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4LMT application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3LMT application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Mask Syntax MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM {ON|OFF|<NR1>} MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM? Related Commands MASK:TESt:STATE, FILESystem:MKDir Arguments turns on this feature, so that waveform data from all active channels is copied to ﬁles upon test failure.
Page 422 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands MASK:TESt:STATE, MASK:TESt:COMPLetion:CRITerion Arguments turns on this feature, so that upon the completion of a mask test, the instrument will send an SRQ command (if registers are set to send SRQ when OPC is asserted.
Page 423 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order is an integer. 0 turns off this feature; any other integer turns it on. <NR1> Examples might return MASK:TEST:SRQ:FAILURE? :MASK:TEST:SRQ:FAILURE 1 indicating that the pass/fail SRQ on failure is turned on. MASK:TESt:STATE This command turns the pass/fail mask test on or off. Most of the other MASK:TEST commands need to be executed before this command.
Page 424 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order A series of examples showing how to use mask commands for typical tasks is included in an appendix. (See page E-1, Mask/Limit Command Sequence Examples.) Conditions This command requires a DPO4LMT application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3LMT application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 425 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:TESt:COMPLetion:CRITerion Arguments turns on this features, so that the instrument stops acquiring data upon failure. turns off this feature. is an integer. 0 turns off this feature; any other value turns it on. <NR1> Examples stops data acquisition upon test failure.
Page 426 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the instrument to change the test status MASK:TESt:STOP:FAILure 50000 to “failing” after 50,000 failed waveforms. might return INFINITE which indicates the MASK:TESt:STOP:FAILure? instrument has been set so that there is no limit to tested waveform violations per test.
Page 427 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order A series of examples showing how to use mask commands for typical tasks is included in an appendix. (See page E-1, Mask/Limit Command Sequence Examples.) Conditions This command requires a DPO4LMT application module for 4000 series models, and an MDO3LMT application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 428 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Mask Syntax MASK:USER:AMPLitude <NR3> MASK:USER:AMPLitude? Related Commands MASK:CUSTom, SAVe:MASK Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that determines the nominal pulse amplitude, in <NR3> volts, of a user-deﬁned custom mask. Examples sets the nominal pulse amplitude of a user-deﬁned MASK:USER:AMPLITUDE 2.4 custom mask to 2.4 volts.
Page 429 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point value that speciﬁes the timing resolution used to a draw <NR3> a user-deﬁned custom mask pulse shape. Examples sets the nominal timing resolution used to draw the MASK:USER:HSCALE 200E–9 mask pulse shape to 200 nanoseconds per division. might return MASK:USER:HSCALE? :MASK:USER:HSCALE 40.0000E–9...
Page 430 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:USER:LABel This command speciﬁes a user-deﬁned label for a custom mask. Conditions This command requires a DPO4LMT application module. Group Mask Syntax MASK:USER:LABel <QString> MASK:USER:LABel? Related Commands MASK:CUSTom, MASK:USER:AMPLitude Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 32 characters. MASK:USER:RECOrdlength This command speciﬁes the nominal record length to be used for pulse mask testing with a user-deﬁned custom mask.
Page 431 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the record length for pulse mask testing MASK:USER:RECOrdlength 5000 with a user-deﬁned mask to 5,000. might return 5000, indicating that a record length MASK:USER:RECOrdlength? of 5,000 has been set. MASK:USER{:SEG<x>|:MASK<x>} (No Query Form) This command deletes the speciﬁed mask segment from the current mask segment.
Page 432 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MASK:USER{:SEG<x>|:MASK<x>}:NR_Pt? Related Commands MASK:CUSTom, SAVe:MASK Returns Integer Examples might return 0, indicating that there is no segment MASK:USER:SEG3:NR_Pt? 3 in the current mask. MASK:USER{:SEG<x>|:MASK<x>}:POINTS This command speciﬁes the x and y coordinates of the points that make up the segment 1–8.
Page 433 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:USER:TRIGTOSAMP This command speciﬁes the nominal time, in seconds, from the (leading edge) trigger position to the pulse bit sampling position, to be used for testing with a user-deﬁned custom mask. NOTE. When you create a custom mask, the horizontal position setting is converted from percent to time, and sets the trigtosamp value.
Page 434 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:USER:VOFFSet This command speciﬁes the nominal value, in volts, to be used to vertically offset the input channels for a user-deﬁned custom mask. A series of examples showing how to use mask commands for typical tasks is included in an appendix.
Page 435 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Mask Syntax MASK:USER:VPOS <NR3> MASK:USER:VPOS? Related Commands MASK:CUSTom, SAVe:MASK Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that sets the nominal vertical position value <NR3> in divisions. Examples sets the user mask nominal vertical position value MASK:USER:VPOS -0.8 to -0.8 divisions.
Page 436 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the user mask nominal vertical scale to MASK:USER:VSCALE200E-3 200 millivolts per division. might return MASK:USER:VSCALE? :MASK:USER:VSCALE 1.0000E-3 indicating that the nominal vertical scale of the displayed mask is set to 1 millivolt per division. MASK:USER:WIDth This command speciﬁes the nominal bit width value, in seconds, to be used for a user-deﬁned custom mask.
Page 437 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return 0.0E+0, which is the default. MASK:USER:WIDTH? MATH[1]? (Query Only) Returns the deﬁnition of the math waveform. The returned data depends on the setting of the MATH[1]:TYPe command. Group Math Syntax MATH[1]? Related Commands MATH[1]:TYPe Examples might return...
Page 438 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH[1]:DEFine This command speciﬁes the current math function as a text string. You must also specify the type (dual waveform, FFT, advanced math, or spectrum math) using MATH[1]:TYPe Dual math expressions are strings of the form <wfm>...
Page 439: Table 2-56: Math Expression Elements
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2-56: Math expression elements Element Description Example CH1-CH4 Speciﬁes an analog channel or :MATH:DEFINE "FFT(CH1)" reference waveform as the data source. REF1-REF4 Referenced as <wfm> in the math operators descriptions. Automatic measurements of waveforms See also MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe...
Page 440 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2-56: Math expression elements (cont.) Element Description Example FREQuency(<wfm>) The ﬁrst cycle in a waveform or gated :MATH:DEFINE region. Frequency is the reciprocal of "FREQUENCY(CH1)" the period; it is measured in hertz (Hz) where one Hz is one cycle per second. HIGH(<wfm>) This value is used as 100% whenever :MATH:DEFINE...
Page 441 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2-56: Math expression elements (cont.) Element Description Example Negative pulse width: the distance NWIdth(<wfm>) :MATH:DEFINE "NWIDTH(CH1)" (time) between the mid reference (default 50%) amplitude points of a negative pulse. The measurement is made on the ﬁrst pulse in the waveform or gated region.
Page 442 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2-56: Math expression elements (cont.) Element Description Example TOVershoot<wfm> Total overshoot is the summation of positive overshoot and the absolute value of negative overshoot. Trigonometric operations on expressions ABS(<expr>) Absolute value of (<expr>) :MATH:DEFINE "ABS(CH2-CH1)"...
Page 443 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2-56: Math expression elements (cont.) Element Description Example Addition, subtraction, multiplication, and + , - , * , / division operators < “Less than” operator :MATH:DEFINE "(CH1 < CH2)" > “Greater than” operator :MATH:DEFINE "(CH1 > CH2)" <= “Less than or equal to”...
Page 444 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH:DEFINE "INTG(1+CH1) + SINE(CH1)*(VAR1+CH2)*CH3 - CAREA(CH4)" Some examples of math expressions are as follows: SPECTRUM MATH:DEFINE "RF_NORMAL - RF_AVERAGE" MATH:DEFINE "RF_NORMAL * RF_AVERAGE" MATH[1]:HORizontal:POSition This command speciﬁes the math horizontal display position for FFT or (non-live) math reference waveforms.
Page 445 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return indicating that the math horizontal scale MATH:? MATH: 2.0E-4 is 200 μ MATH[1]:HORizontal:UNIts Returns the math waveform horizontal measurement unit value. Group Math Syntax MATH[1]:HORizontal:UNIts? Examples might return MATH:HORIZONTAL:UNITS? MATH:HORIZONTAL:UNITS "?" indicating that the math horizontal unit label for unknown values is the default question mark unit.
Page 446 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MATH[1]:SPECTral:MAG {LINEAr|DB} MATH[1]:SPECTral:MAG? Arguments sets the SpectralMag units to linear. LINEAR sets the SpectralMag units to decibels. Examples sets the SpectralMag units for Math1 to decibels. MATH1:SPECTRAL:MAG DB might return indicating MATH1:SPECTRAL:MAG? :MATH1:SPECTRAL:MAG DB that the SpectralMag units for Math1 are set to decibels.
Page 447 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH[1]:TYPe This command speciﬁes the math type ( DUAL, FFT, ADVanced or ). This command is used along with MATH[1]:DEFine, which speciﬁes SPECTRUM the current mathematical expression as a text string which deﬁnes the waveform. You must specify the math type before deﬁning the math expression.
Page 448 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Math Syntax MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition <NR3> MATH[1]:VERTical:POSition? Related Commands CH<x>:POSition, REF<x>:VERTical:POSition Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the desired position in divisions <NR3> from the center graticule. Examples positions the Math 1 input signal MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION 1.3E+00 1.3 divisions higher than a position of 0.
Page 449 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH[1]:VERTical:UNIts Returns the math waveform vertical measurement unit value. Group Math Syntax MATH[1]:VERTical:UNIts? Examples might return MATH:VERTICAL:UNITS? MATH:VERTICAL:UNITS "joules" indicating that the math vertical unit label for unknown values is joules. MATHVAR? (Query Only) Queries both numerical values you can use within math expressions. Group Math Syntax...
Page 450 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MATHVAR:VAR<x> <NR3> MATHVAR:VAR<x>? Related Commands MATHVAR:VAR<x>, MATH[1]:DEFine Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the numerical value to be stored <NR3> in location x <1 through 2>. Examples stores the value -2.43e-5 in the second math variable MATHVAR:VAR2 -2.43E-5 location.
Page 451 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1 0.0000;MID2 0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW 10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2 50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE OFF;NUMHORZ 0;NUMVERT 0;HORZ1 99.0000E +36;HORZ2 99.0000E+36;HORZ3 99.0000E+36;HORZ4 99.0000E+36;VERT1 99.0000E+36;VERT2 99.0000E+36;VERT3 99.0000E+36;VERT4 99.0000E+36;:MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE OFF;WEIGHTING 32;:MEASUREMENT:GATING SCREEN MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot (No Query Form) Removes the measurement snapshot display. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot Related Commands...
Page 452 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return MEASUREMENT:GATING? :MEASUREMENT:GATING CURSOR indicating that measurements are limited to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors. MEASUrement:IMMed? (Query Only) Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:IMMed? Examples might return MEASUREMENT:IMMED? :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS;EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2...
Page 453 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Measurement Group Syntax MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIRection {BACKWards|FORWards} MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIRection? Related Commands MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x> Arguments starts the search at the end of the waveform and looks for the last BACKWards rising or falling edge in the waveform. starts the search at the beginning of the waveform and looks for the FORWards ﬁrst rising or falling edge in the waveform.
Page 454 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples speciﬁes that the "from" waveform MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement. returns either RISE or FALL. MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1? MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x> For SOURce1: This command speciﬁes the source for all single channel measurements.
Page 455 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Digital channel measurements do not have a user-settable midRef threshold. If you specify a digital channel measurement that is not available on MSO/MDO4000/B models (or MDO3000 and MDO4000C models with the MDO3MSO or MDO4MSO option installed), measurement error 2200: measurement system error occurs and 9.91e37 (not a number) is returned.
Page 456 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order measures the time between the middle reference (default = 50%) amplitude DELay point of the source waveform and the destination waveform. measures the time taken for the falling edge of the ﬁrst pulse in the FALL waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value (default is 90%) to a low reference value (default is 10%).
Page 457 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order measures the number of points in the largest bin of the histogram. PEAKHits (positive duty cycle) is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal PDUty period, expressed as a percentage. It is measured on the ﬁrst cycle in the waveform or gated region.
Page 458 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (total overshoot) (MDO models only) measures the sum of the TOVershoot positive and negative overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region. This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels. (waveform count) measures the number of waveforms used to WAVEFORMS calculate the histogram.
Page 459 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Unit string Description "V" volts volts per ampere "V/A" "V/V" volts per volt "V/W" volts per watt "V/dB" volts per decibel "V/s" volts per second "VA" volt-amperes "VAR" volt-amperes resistive "VV" volts squared "VW" volt-watts "VdB"...
Page 460 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Unit string Description "hr" hours "joules" joules "min" minutes "ohms" ohms "percent" percent "pulses" pulses "s" seconds "unk" unknown Examples might return MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNITS? :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNIts "s" indicating that units for the immediate measurement are in seconds. MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue? (Query Only) Returns the value of the measurement speciﬁed by the MEASUrement:IMMed:...
Page 461 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE? :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it, 9.9000E+37. then an item is added to the error queue. The error can be checked for with the *ESR? ALLEv? commands.
Page 462 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMHORZ? Examples might return MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:NUMHORZ? indicating there are currently MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:NUMHORZ 2 2 horizontal lines drawn on the graticule. The indicators show where the measurement speciﬁed by MEASUrement:INDICators:STATE is being performed. MEASUrement:INDICators:NUMVERT? (Query Only) Returns the number of vertical measurement indicators currently being displayed. Group Measurement Syntax...
Page 463 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples turns on the display of visible MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE MEAS2 measurement indicators for measurement 2. might return MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE? indicating that no measurement MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE OFF indicators are active. MEASUrement:INDICators:VERT<x>? (Query Only) Returns the value of the speciﬁed vertical measurement indicator <x> from the trigger point, where <x>...
Page 464 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:COUNT? :MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:COUNT 3247. MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay? (Query Only) Returns the delay measurement parameters for the measurement speciﬁed by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 8. Measurement Group Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay? Examples might return MEASUREMENT:MEAS1? :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS;EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIRection This command speciﬁes the starting point and direction that determines...
Page 465 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples starts searching from MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:DIRECTION BACKWARDS the end of the waveform record. might return MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:DIRECTION? indicating :MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:DIRECTION BACKWARDS that the current search direction is backwards. MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x> This command speciﬁes the slope of the edge used for the delay "from" or "to" waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement.
Page 466 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN? (Query Only) Returns the mean value accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset. Measurements are speciﬁed by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN? Examples might return MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEAN? :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEAN 514.71E-09.
Page 467 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Measurement Group Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x> {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH|R1|R2|R3|R4|D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7 |D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|HIStogram|RF_AMPlitude| RF_FREQuency|RF_PHASe} MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>? Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe Arguments is an analog channel to use as the source waveform. CH1–4 is the math waveform. MATH is a reference waveform to use as the source waveform. REF1–4 is a digital channel to use as the source waveform.
Page 468 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>} MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE? Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>, MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe Arguments disables calculation and display of the speciﬁed measurement slot. enables calculation and display of the speciﬁed measurement slot. = 0 disables calculation and display of the speciﬁed measurement slot; any <NR1>...
Page 469 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Measurement Group Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe {AMPlitude|AREa|BURst|CARea|CMEan|CRMs|DELay|FALL|FREQuency |HIGH|HITS|LOW|MAXimum|MEAN|MEDian|MINImum|NDUty|NEDGECount |NOVershoot|NPULSECount|NWIdth|PEAKHits|PDUty|PEDGECount|PERIod |PHAse|PK2Pk|POVershoot|PPULSECount|PWIdth|RISe|RMS|SIGMA1|SIGMA2 |SIGMA3|STDdev|TOVershoot|WAVEFORMS} MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe? Arguments measures the amplitude of the selected waveform. In other words, it AMPlitude measures the high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
Page 470 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order measures the High reference (100% level, sometimes called Topline) of a HIGH waveform. This measurement is applicable only to the analog channels. (histogram hits) measures the number of points in or on the histogram box. HITS measures the Low reference (0% level, sometimes called Baseline) of a waveform.
Page 471 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order measures the phase difference (amount of time a waveform leads or lags PHAse the reference waveform) between two waveforms. The measurement is made between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in degrees, where 360°...
Page 472 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts? (Query Only) Returns the units associated with the speciﬁed measurement. The measurement slots are speciﬁed by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 8 (only 4 in MDO3000 models). Measurement Group Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts? Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe Returns This query returns one of the following strings.
Page 473 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Unit string Description "VAR" volt-amperes resistive "VV" volts squared "VW" volt-watts "VdB" volts-decibels "Vs" volt-seconds "W" watts watts per ampere "W/A" "W/V" watts per volt watts per watt "W/W" "W/dB" watt per decibel "W/s" watts per second "WA"...
Page 474 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Unit string Description "s" seconds "unk" unknown Examples might return MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:UNITS? :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:UNIts % indicating units for measurement 1 are set to percent. MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue? (Query Only) Returns a calculate value for the measurement speciﬁed by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 8 (only 4 in MDO3000 models).
Page 475 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MEASUrement:METHod {Auto|HIStogram|MINMax} MEASUrement:METHod? Related Commands MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH, MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW, MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x>, Arguments selects the best method for each data set. Auto sets the high and low waveform levels statistically using a histogram HIStogram algorithm. uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record. This selection MINMax is best for examining waveforms with no large, ﬂat portions of a common value, such as sine waves and triangle waves.
Page 476 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements:IMMed and the four periodic measurements. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH <NR3> MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH? Related Commands MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe, MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the high reference level, in volts. <NR3>...
Page 477 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the low reference level, in volts. <NR3> The default is 0.0 V. Examples sets the low reference level MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0 to 0.0 V. might return MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW? indicating :MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0000E+00 that the absolute low reference level is set to 0.0 V.
Page 478 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod Speciﬁes or returns the reference level units used for measurement calculations. NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements (4 in MDO3000). To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Page 479 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH <NR3> MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH? Related Commands MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe, MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the high reference level, ranging <NR3> from 0 to 100%. The default high reference level is 90%. Examples sets the high reference level to MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH95 95% of HIGH.
Page 480 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the high reference level to MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 15 15% of HIGH. might return MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW? indicating that the :MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 10 percentage high reference level is set to 10% of HIGH. MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x> This command speciﬁes the percent (where 100% is equal to HIGH) that is used to calculate a mid reference level.
Page 481 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order The query form returns statistic settings. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:STATIstics RESET MEASUrement:STATIstics? Arguments clears the measurements. RESET MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe Controls the operation and display of management statistics. Measurement Group Syntax MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe {OFF|ALL} MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe? Related Commands MEASUrement:STATIstics Arguments turns all measurements off.
Page 482 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe Arguments is the number of samples used for the mean and standard deviation <NR1> statistical accumulations. Examples sets statistical weighting to four MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING 4 samples. might return MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING? indicating that :MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING 4 measurement statistics weighting is currently set to 4 samples.
Page 483 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MESSage:BOX <X1>,<Y1>[,<X2>,<Y2>] MESSage:BOX? Related Commands MESSage:STATE, MESSage:SHOW, MESSage:CLEAR Arguments = 0 to 1023, and are pixel positions along the horizontal axis. <X1> <X2> deﬁnes the left and deﬁnes the right side of the window. <X1>...
Page 484 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MESSage:SHOW <QString> MESSage:SHOW? Related Commands MESSage:BOX MESSage:CLEAR MESSage:STATE Arguments is the message and can include any of the characters shown in <QString> the Character Set. (See page A-1, Character Set.)The maximum length of the message is 1000 characters;...
Page 485 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Bit 7 Bit 6 If set, inverse video is toggled from current state and the following text is displayed in the new inverse state until the state is toggled again. Remaining bits are ignored Bit 5 If set, the color index in the four LSB’s (bits 0 through 3) is applied to the foreground or background color depending on the fg/bg bit (bit 4).
Page 486 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Another way to enter characters is \xnn where the nn is the hexadecimal value of the character to display. An advantage of these methods is that any controller program can be used. Another advantage is it’s easy to access characters with the high bit set, that is, those characters with a decimal value greater than 127.
Page 487 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments removes the message window from the screen. OFF or <NR1> = 0 displays the message window and its contents on the screen. ON or <NR1> ≠ 0 NEWpass (No Query Form) This command changes the password that enables access to password protected data.
Page 488 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax *OPC *OPC? Related Commands BUSY?, *WAI Examples generates the operation complete message in the SESR at the completion of *OPC all pending OPC operations. might return 1 to indicate that all pending OPC operations are ﬁnished. *OPC? *OPT? (Query Only) Returns a comma-separated list of installed options (not to be confused with...
Page 489 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Miscellaneous Syntax PASSWord <QString> Related Commands NEWpass, *PUD Arguments is the password and can include up to 10 characters. The factory <QString> default password is “XYZZY” and is always valid. Examples enables the *PUD and NEWpass set commands. PASSWORD“XYZZY”...
Page 490 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the default setting of the printer. DEFLT enables the date print on the print output. disables the date print on the print output. Examples enables the date print on the print output. PICTBRIDGE:DATEPRINT ON ? might return PICTBRIDGE:DATEPRINT PICTBRIDGE:DATEPRINT DEFLT...
Page 491 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ? might return indicating PICTBRIDGE:IDPRINT PICTBRIDGE:IDPRINT OFF that the ID print is disabled on the print output. PICTBridge:IMAGESize This command speciﬁes the image print size. Group PictBridge Syntax PICTBridge:IMAGESize {DEFLT|IN2P5BY3P25|L|IN4BY6|L2|IN8BY10|L4|E|CARD|HAGAKIPcard |CM6BY8|CM7BY10|CM9BY13|CM10BY15|CM13BY18|CM15BY21|CM18BY24| A4|LETTER} PICTBridge:IMAGESize? Arguments for a default image print size. DEFLT for a 2_5*3_25 image print size.
Page 492 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the image print size to 89 MM* 55 MM. PICTBRIDGE:IMAGESIZE CARD ? might return PICTBRIDGE:IMAGESIZE PICTBRIDGE:IMAGESIZE DEFLT indicating the default image print size. PICTBridge:PAPERSize Sets the output print paper size. Group PictBridge Syntax PICTBridge:PAPERSize DEFLT|L|L2|HAGAKIPCARD|MM54BY86|MM100BY150|IN4BY6|IN8BY10 |LETTER|IN11BY17|A0|A1|A2|A3|A4|A5|A6|A7|A8...
Page 493 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order for a A7 paper size. for a A8 paper size. for a A9 paper size. for a B0 paper size. for a B1 paper size. for a B2 paper size. for a B3 paper size. for a B4 paper size.
Page 494 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order for a photo print paper type. PHOTO for a fastphoto print paper type. FASTPHOTO Examples sets the paper type to Plain. PICTBRIDGE:PAPERTYPE PLAIN might return PICTBRIDGE:PAPERTYPE? PICTBRIDGE:PAPERTYPE DEFLT indicating the default paper type. PICTBridge:PRINTQual This command speciﬁes the output print quality. Group PictBridge Syntax...
Page 495 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets an analog channel as the current source. CH1–CH4 sets a reference waveform as the current source. REF1–REF4 Examples sets the current source as CH1. POWER:CURRENTSOURCE CH1 ? might return indicating POWER:CURRENTSOURCE POWER:CURRENTSOURCE CH2 that CH2 is the current source.
Page 496 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Power Group Syntax POWer:GATESOurce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4|NONe} POWer:GATESOurce? Arguments sets an analog channel as the gate source. CH1–CH4 sets a reference waveform as the gate source. REF1–REF4 is set when the gate source is not used in the application. NONe Examples sets the gated source as CH1.
Page 497 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:HARMonics:DISplay:SELect This command speciﬁes the harmonics to be displayed when the harmonics standard is NONe. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Power Group Syntax...
Page 498 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the display type to graphical. POWER:HARMONICS:DISPLAY:TYPE GRAph might return POWER:HARMONICS:DISPLAY:TYPE? indicating that the display type is :POWER:HARMONICS:DISPLAY:TYPE TAB set to tabular. POWer:HARMonics:FREQRef This command speciﬁes the frequency reference used when the harmonic standard is None.
Page 499 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Power Group Syntax POWer:HARMonics:FREQRef:FIXEDFREQValue <NR3> POWer:HARMonics:FREQRef:FIXEDFREQValue? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the ﬁxed frequency value. <NR3> Examples sets the frequency to POWER:HARMONICS:FREQREF:FIXEDFREQVALUE 100 100 Hz. might return POWER:HARMONICS:FREQREF:FIXEDFREQVALUE? indicating that the ﬁxed :POWer:HARMonics:FREQREF:FIXEDFREQVALUE 60 frequency value is set to 60 Hz.
Page 500 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:HARMonics:IEC:FILter This command speciﬁes the enabled state for ﬁltering of IEC harmonics. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:HARMonics:IEC:FILter {OFF|ON|0|1} POWer:HARMonics:IEC:FILter?
Page 501 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return POWER:HARMONICS:IEC:FUNDAMENTAL? indicating that the :POWER:HARMONICS:IEC:FUNDAMENTAL 16 fundamental current for IEC harmonics is set to 16.0000 A. POWer:HARMonics:IEC:GROUPing This command speciﬁes the enabled state for grouping of IEC harmonics. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 502 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the class D input power to POWER:HARMONICS:IEC:INPUTPOWER 600 600 W. might return POWER:HARMONICS:IEC:INPUTPOWER? indicating that the class D input :POWER:HARMONICS:IEC:INPUTPOWER 100 power is set to 100 W. POWer:HARMonics:IEC:LINEFREQuency This command speciﬁes the line frequency for the IEC standard. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 503 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the IEC observation period. Valid <NR3> values ranges from 0.2 to 10 s. Examples sets the IEC observation period to POWER:HARMONICS:IEC:OBSPERIOD 3 3.0000 s. might return POWER:HARMONICS:IEC:OBSPERIOD? indicating that the IEC observation :POWER:HARMONICS:IEC:OBSPERIOD 10 period is set to 10 s.
Page 504 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:HARMonics:MIL:FUNDamental:CALCmethod {MEAS|USER} POWer:HARMonics:MIL:FUNDamental:CALCmethod? Arguments speciﬁes that the value of the fundamental current used in calculating limits MEAS is measured. speciﬁes that the value of the fundamental current used in calculated limits USER is user deﬁned. Examples sets the POWER:HARMONICS:MIL:FUNDAMENTAL:CALCMETHOD USER...
Page 505 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:HARMonics:MIL:LINEFREQuency <NR1> POWer:HARMonics:MIL:LINEFREQuency? Arguments is an unsigned integer that speciﬁes the line frequency for the MIL <NR1>...
Page 506 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:HARMonics:NR_HARMonics This command speciﬁes the number of harmonics (value ranging from 20 to 400) when the harmonics standard is NONe. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax...
Page 507 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:HARMonics:RESults:HAR<1-400>:IECMAX? (Query Only) The IEC Standard speciﬁes harmonics measurements to be computed in time windows, with each time window being nominally 200 ms. This returns the maximum of the RMS magnitude of the harmonic, computed across successive 200 ms time windows within an observation period entered by the user.
Page 508 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:HARMonics:RESults:HAR<1-400>:PHASe? (Query Only) Returns the phase of the harmonic in degrees. The phase is measured relative to the zero-crossing of the reference waveform. When there is no reference waveform, the phase is relative to the fundamental component. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 509 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Power Group Syntax POWer:HARMonics:RESults:HAR<1-400>:RMS:PERCent? Examples might return POWER:HARMONICS:RESULTS:HAR400:RMS:PERCENT? indicating that the :POWER:HARMONICS:RESULTS:HAR400:RMS:PERCENT 33 RMS magnitude of the harmonic is set to 33%. POWer:HARMonics:RESults:HAR<1-400>:TEST:IEC:CLASSALIMit? (Query Only) Speciﬁes if the IEC Class A higher harmonic limit (and conditions) are met. NOTE.
Page 510 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order , or Returns PASS FAIL POWer:HARMonics:RESults:HAR<1-400>:TEST:IEC:POHCLIMit? (Query Only) Speciﬁes if the higher harmonic limit (and conditions) for the 21st and higher order odd harmonics are met. NOTE. The query returns NA if the limit does not apply for a speciﬁc harmonic. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 511 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:HARMonics:RESults:IEC:FUNDamental? (Query Only) Returns the IEC fundamental current used in calculating limits. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:HARMonics:RESults:IEC:FUNDamental? Examples...
Page 512 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. The query returns NA the harmonic limit does not apply. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:HARMonics:RESults:IEC:HARM5ALTernate? , or Returns...
Page 513 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Power Group Syntax POWer:HARMonics:RESults:IEC:POHL? Examples might return POWER:HARMONICS:RESULTS:IEC:POHL? indicating that the :POWER:HARMONICS:RESULTS:IEC:POHL 0.5 IEC POHL is set to 0.5 A. POWer:HARMonics:RESults:IEC:POWer? (Query Only) Returns the IEC input power that is used to calculate limits. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 514 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:HARMonics:RESults:PASSFail? (Query Only) Returns the overall harmonics test result: PASS, FAIL or NA. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:HARMonics:RESults:PASSFail?
Page 515 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:HARMonics:RESults:SAVe <String> POWer:HARMonics:RESults:THDF? (Query Only) Returns the Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) in percentage, measured as a ratio to the RMS value of the fundamental component of the source waveform. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 516 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:HARMonics:SOURce {VOLTage|CURRent} POWer:HARMonics:SOURce? Arguments speciﬁes voltage source waveform for harmonic tests. VOLTage speciﬁes current source waveform for harmonic tests.
Page 517 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:INDICators This command speciﬁes the state of the measurement indicators for the power application. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Power Group Syntax...
Page 518 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the modulation source to Current. POWER:MODULATION:SOURCE CURRent might return POWER:MODULATION:SOURCE? :POWER:MODULATION:SOURCE indicating that the modulation source is set to Voltage. VOLT POWer:MODulation:TYPe This command speciﬁes the modulation type. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 519 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the modulation type to Negative Width. POWER:MODULATION:TYPE NWIDTH might return POWER:MODULATION:TYPE? :POWER:MODULATION:TYPE PWI indicating that the modulation type is set to Positive Width. POWer:QUALity:APPpwr? (Query Only) Returns the apparent power measurement. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 520 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:QUALity:DISplay:FREQuency This command speciﬁes the display state for the frequency readout. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:QUALity:DISplay:FREQuency {OFF|ON|0|1} POWer:QUALity:DISplay:FREQuency? Arguments...
Page 521 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return POWER:QUALITY:DISPLAY:ICRESTFACTOR? indicating that the :POWER:QUALITY:DISPLAY:ICRESTFACTOR 0 current crest factor display is off. POWer:QUALity:DISplay:IRMS This command speciﬁes the display state for the rms current readout. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 522 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments or 0 turns off the phase angle display. or 1 turns on the phase angle display. Examples turns on the phase angle display. POWER:QUALITY:DISPLAY:PHASEANGLE 1 might return POWER:QUALITY:DISPLAY:PHASEANGLE? indicating that the :POWER:QUALITY:DISPLAY:PHASEANGLE 0 phase angle display is off. POWer:QUALity:DISplay:POWERFACtor This command speciﬁes the display state for the power factor readout.
Page 523 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:QUALity:DISplay:REACTpwr {OFF|ON|0|1} POWer:QUALity:DISplay:REACTpwr? Arguments or 0 turns off the reactor power display. or 1 turns on the reactor power display. Examples turns on the reactor power display. POWER:QUALITY:DISPLAY:REACTPWR 1 might return POWER:QUALITY:DISPLAY:REACTPWR? indicating that the reactor power :POWER:QUALITY:DISPLAY:REACTPWR 0 display is off.
Page 524 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Power Group Syntax POWer:QUALity:DISplay:VCRESTfactor {OFF|ON|0|1} POWer:QUALity:DISplay:VCRESTfactor? Arguments or 0 turns off the voltage crest factor display. or 1 turns on the voltage crest factor display. Examples turns on the voltage crest factor POWER:QUALITY:DISPLAY:VCRESTFACTOR 1 display. might return POWER:QUALITY:DISPLAY:VCRESTFACTOR? indicating that the...
Page 525 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:QUALity:FREQREFerence {VOLTage|CURRent} POWer:QUALity:FREQREFerence? Arguments sets voltage as the power quality frequency reference source. VOLTage sets current as the power quality frequency reference source.
Page 526 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Power Group Syntax POWer:QUALity:ICRESTfactor? Examples might return POWER:QUALITY:ICRESTFACTOR? indicating that the current crest factor :POWER:QUALITY:ICRESTfactor 1.4 value is set to 1.4. POWer:QUALity:IRMS? (Query Only) Returns the RMS current measurement. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 527 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:QUALity:POWERFACtor? (Query Only) Returns the power factor measurement. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Power Group Syntax POWer:QUALity:POWERFACtor? Examples might return POWER:QUALITY:POWERFACTOR? indicating that the power factor is :POWER:QUALITY:POWERFACTOR 1.0...
Page 528 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:QUALity:TRUEpwr? Examples might return POWER:QUALITY:TRUEPWR? :POWER:QUALITY:TRUEpwr indicating that the true power value is set to 1000 W. 1000 W POWer:QUALity:VCRESTfactor? (Query Only) This query returns the measurement for the voltage crest factor. Conditions This command requires the optional power analysis application module DPO4PWR Group Power...
Page 529 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:QUALity:VRMS? Examples might return indicating POWER:QUALITY:VRMS? :POWER:QUALITY:VRMS 115 that the rms voltage value is set to 115 V. POWer:REFLevel:ABSolute (No Query Form) This command sets the reference levels to be used for power measurements their default unit values.
Page 530 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the absolute high value to 2.000. POWER:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 2 might return POWER:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH? indicating that the absolute high POWER:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 2 value is set to 2 V. POWer:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW This command speciﬁes the low reference level to be used for power measurements.
Page 531 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID<x> <NR3>; Ranges={D,-1e6,+1E6} POWer:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID<x>? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the absolute mid reference value. <NR3> Examples sets the mid reference voltage to 1V. POWER:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID1 1 might return POWER:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID1? indicating that the absolute POWER:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID1 0.0E+0 reference voltage level is set to 0.0E+0 V.
Page 532 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Power Group Syntax POWer:REFLevel:METHod {ABSolute|PERCent} POWer:REFLevel:METHod? Arguments speciﬁes that the reference levels are set explicitly using the ABSolute commands. This method is useful when MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute precise values are required. speciﬁes that the reference levels are calculated as a percent PERCent of the signal amplitude.
Page 533 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH <NR3>; Ranges={D,0.0,100.0} POWer:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the high value in percent. <NR3>...
Page 534 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x> This command speciﬁes one of 3 mid reference percentage levels to be used for power measurements. MID1 is used on the user’s voltage waveform. MID2 is used on the user’s current waveform. MID3 is used on the user’s gate waveform. (MID3 is speciﬁc to power applications.) Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models,...
Page 535 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:RIPPle:RESults:AMPLitude? (Query Only) Returns the peak-to-peak ripple measurement. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Power Group Syntax POWer:RIPPle:RESults:AMPLitude? Examples might return POWER:RIPPLE:RESULTS:AMPLITUDE? indicating that the peak-to-peak :POWER:RIPPLE:RESULTS:AMPLITUDE 1...
Page 536 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:RIPPle:RESults:MEAN? Examples might return POWER:RIPPLE:RESULTS:MEAN? indicating that the mean peak-to-peak :POWER:RIPPLE:RESULTS:MEAN 1.0 amplitude is set to 1.0 V. POWer:RIPPle:RESults:MIN? (Query Only) Returns the minimum of the peak-to-peak ripple measurement. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 537 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:RIPPle:SOUrce This command speciﬁes the source waveform for ripple tests. The voltage source waveform is speciﬁed using the POWer:VOLTAGESOurce command and the current waveform is speciﬁed using the POWer:CURRENTSOurce command. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 538 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the XMAX value to 700.0000. POWER:SOA:LINEAR:XMAX 700 might return POWER:SOA:LINEAR:XMAX ? :POWER:SOA:LINear:XMAX indicating that the XMAX value for linear plot type is set to 500.0000. 500.0000 POWer:SOA:LINear:XMIN This command speciﬁes the user XMIN value for use in linear SOA calculations. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 539 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the YMAX value to 700.0000. POWER:SOA:LINEAR:YMAX 700 might return POWER:SOA:LINEAR:YMAX ? :POWER:SOA:LINear:YMAX indicating that the YMAX value for linear plot type is set to 50.0000. 50.0000 POWer:SOA:LINear:YMIN This command speciﬁes the user YMIN value for use in linear SOA calculations. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 540 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the XMAX value to 1.0000. POWER:SOA:LOG:XMAX 1 might return POWER:SOA:LOG:XMAX ? :POWER:SOA:LOG:XMAX 1.0000E+3 indicating that the XMAX value for log plot type is set to 1.0000E+3. POWer:SOA:LOG:XMIN This command speciﬁes the user XMIN value for use in Log SOA calculations. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 541 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the YMAX value to 10.0000. POWER:SOA:LOG:YMAX 10 might return POWER:SOA:LOG:YMAX ? :POWER:SOA:LOG:YMAX 100.0000 indicating that the YMAX value for log plot type is set to 100.0000. POWer:SOA:LOG:YMIN This command speciﬁes the user YMIN value for use in Log SOA calculations. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 542 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that represents the SOA mask coordinates. <NR3> Examples speciﬁes the SOA mask coordinates as POWER:SOA:MASK:DEFINE 10 0.0E+0,0.0E+0,0.0E+0,0.0E+0,0.0E+0,30.0000,25.0000,30.0000,300.0000,2.5000, 300.0000,2.4000,300.0000,2.2000,300.0000,1.9000,300.0000,1.3000, 300.0000,0.0E+0. might return POWER:SOA:MASK:DEFINE ? :POWER:SOA:MASK:DEFINE 0.0E+0,30.0000,25.0000,30.0000,300.0000,2.5000,300.0000,0.0E+0 indicating that the SOA mask coordinates are set to 0.0E+0,30.0000,25.0000,30.0000,300.0000,2.5000,300.0000,0.0E+0.
Page 543 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:SOA:MASK:MAXVolts <NR3> POWer:SOA:MASK:MAXVolts? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the maximum voltage applied <NR3> to SOA mask testing. Examples sets the SOA mask testing voltage to 200 V. POWER:SOA:MASK:MAXVOLTS 200 might return POWER:SOA:MASK:MAXVOLTS ? :POWER:SOA:MASK:MAXVOLTS indicating that the SOA mask testing maximum voltage is set to 300 V.
Page 544 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:SOA:MASK:NR_Pt? Examples might return POWER:SOA:MASK:NR_PT? :POWER:SOA:MASK:NR_PT 4 indicating that the number of mask points deﬁned is 4. POWer:SOA:MASK:STATE This command speciﬁes the state of the mask for SOA calculations. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 545 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:SOA:MASK:STOPOnviol {OFF|ON|0|1} POWer:SOA:MASK:STOPOnviol? Arguments or 0 enables mask stop on violations. or 1 disables mask stop on violations. Examples disables the state of the mask stop on POWER:SOA:MASK:STOPONVIOL 1 violation condition. might return POWER:SOA:MASK:STOPONVIOL ? indicating that the mask stop is enabled.
Page 546 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Power Group Syntax POWer:SOA:RESult:FAILures:QTY? Examples might return POWER:SOA:RESULT:FAILURES:QTY? indicating that the number of failures is 0. :POWER:SOA:RESULT:FAILURES 0 POWer:SOA:RESult:NUMACq? (Query Only) Returns the number of acquisitions in the test. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 547 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:STATIstics (No Query Form) Clears all the accumulated statistics of all measurements. Performs the same function as the MEASUrement:STATIstics command. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Power Group Syntax...
Page 548 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:STATIstics:WEIghting Sets the number of samples which are included for the statistics computations for mean and the standard deviation. Performs the same function as the MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting command. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 549 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the conduction calculation POWER:SWLOSS:CONDCALCMETHOD RDSon method to RDSon. might return POWER:SWLOSS:CONDCALCMETHOD ? indicating that the conduction :POWER:SWLOSS:CONDCALCMETHOD VOLT calculation method is set to Voltage. POWer:SWLoss:CONDuction:ENERGY:MAX? (Query Only) Returns the maximum conduction energy for switching loss calculation. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 550 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:SWLoss:CONDuction:ENERGY:MIN? (Query Only) Returns the minimum conduction energy for the switching loss calculation. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:SWLoss:CONDuction:ENERGY:MIN?
Page 551 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:SWLoss:CONDuction:POWer:MEAN? Examples might return POWER:SWLOSS:CONDUCTION:POWER:MEAN? indicating that the :POWER:SWLOSS:CONDUCTION:POWER:MEAN 1 mean conduction power switching loss calculation is set to 1 W. POWer:SWLoss:CONDuction:POWer:MIN? (Query Only) Returns the minimum conduction power for the switching loss calculation. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 552 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples displays only energy loss measurements POWER:SWLOSS:DISPLAY ENERGYLoss in the results. might return POWER:SWLOSS:DISPLAY ? :POWER:SWLOSS:DISPLAY ALL indicating that the results displays both energy and power loss measurements. POWer:SWLoss:GATe:POLarity This command speciﬁes the switching loss gate polarity. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 553 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the gate turn on level to 3.5000. POWER:SWLOSS:GATE:TURNON 3.5 might return POWER:SWLOSS:GATE:TURNON ? :POWER:SWLOSS:GATE:TURNON indicating that the gating turn on level is set to 1.5. POWer:SWLoss:NUMCYCles? (Query Only) Returns the number of cycles counted for the switching loss calculation. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 554 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the RDSON switching loss <NR3> calculation. Examples sets the RDSon value to 30.0000. POWER:SWLOSS:RDSON 30 might return POWER:SWLOSS:RDSON ? :POWER:SWLOSS:RDSon 20.0000E-3 indicating that the RDSon value is set to 20.0000E-3. POWer:SWLoss:REFLevel:ABSolute:GATEMid This command speciﬁes the mid voltage reference level used in switching loss power measurements in volts.
Page 555 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:SWLoss:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOWCurrent <NR3> POWer:SWLoss:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOWCurrent? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the low voltage current level in <NR3> amperes. Examples sets the absolute POWER:SWLOSS:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOWCURRENT 2.8 reference low current to 2.8000 A. might return POWER:SWLOSS:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOWCURRENT ? indicating that :POWER:SWLOSS:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOWCURRENT 5.0000 the absolute reference low current is set to 5.0000 A.
Page 556 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:SWLoss:REFLevel:PERCent:GATEMid <NR3> POWer:SWLoss:REFLevel:PERCent:GATEMid? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the mid voltage reference level <NR3>...
Page 557 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:SWLoss:REFLevel:PERCent:LOWVoltage This command speciﬁes the low voltage reference level used in switching loss power measurements in percent. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Power Group Syntax...
Page 558 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:SWLoss:TOFF:ENERGY:MEAN? (Query Only) Returns the mean Toff energy for the switching loss calculation. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:SWLoss:TOFF:ENERGY:MEAN?
Page 559 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:SWLoss:TOFF:POWer:MAX? Examples might return POWER:SWLOSS:TOFF:POWER:MAX? indicating that the maximum Toff power :POWER:SWLOSS:TON:POWER:MAX 1 switching loss calculation is set to 1 W. POWer:SWLoss:TOFF:POWer:MEAN? (Query Only) Returns the mean Toff power for the switching loss calculation. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 560 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:SWLoss:TON:ENERGY:MAX? (Query Only) Returns the maximum Ton energy for the switching loss calculation. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:SWLoss:TON:ENERGY:MAX?
Page 561 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:SWLoss:TON:ENERGY:MIN? Examples might return POWER:SWLOSS:TON:ENERGY:MIN? indicating that the minimum Ton energy :POWER:SWLOSS:TON:ENERGY:MIN 1 switching loss calculation is set to 1 J. POWer:SWLoss:TON:POWer:MAX? (Query Only) Returns the maximum Ton power for the switching loss calculation. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 562 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:SWLoss:TON:POWer:MIN? (Query Only) Returns the minimum Ton power for the switching loss calculation. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:SWLoss:TON:POWer:MIN?
Page 563 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax POWer:SWLoss:TOTal:ENERGY:MEAN? Examples might return POWER:SWLOSS:TOTAL:ENERGY:MEAN? indicating that the mean conduction :POWER:SWLOSS:TOTAL:ENERGY:MEAN 1 energy switching loss calculation is set to 1 J. POWer:SWLoss:TOTal:ENERGY:MIN? (Query Only) Returns the minimum total energy for the switching loss calculation. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models.
Page 564 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POWer:SWLoss:TOTal:POWer:MEAN? (Query Only) Returns the mean total power loss. Conditions This command requires a DPO4PWR application module for 4000 series models, or an MDO3PWR application module for MDO3000 series models. Group Power Syntax POWer:SWLoss:TOTal:POWer:MEAN? Examples might return POWER:SWLOSS:TOTAL:POWER:MEAN? indicating that the mean total power...
Page 565 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Power Group Syntax POWer:SWLoss:VCEsat <NR3> POWer:SWLoss:VCEsat? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the VCEsat switching loss <NR3> calculation. Examples sets the VCEsat value to 5.0000. POWER:SWLOSS:VCESAT 5 might return POWER:SWLOSS:VCESAT ? :POWER:SWLOSS:VCEsat 2.0000 indicating that the VCEsat value is set to 2.0000.
Page 566 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Use the harmonics functions to obtain the frequency spectrum of the HARMonics source waveform and associated measurement values. Harmonic measurements can help one perform in-depth troubleshooting of power quality problems. Use the ripple functions to obtain measurements and statistics for the RIPPle AC components of the acquired waveform.
Page 567 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order *PSC This command speciﬁes the power-on status ﬂag that controls the automatic power-on handling of the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers. When *PSC is true, the DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at power-on.
Page 568 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a block containing up to 300 ASCII characters. <Block> is a string containing up to 300 ASCII characters. <QString> Examples stores the string "This *PUD #229This oscilloscope belongs to me oscilloscope belongs to me" in the user protected data area. might return *PUD? #221PROPERTY OF COMPANY X...
Page 569 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order A series of examples showing how to use mask commands for typical tasks is included in an appendix. (See page E-1, Mask/Limit Command Sequence Examples.) Conditions This command requires a DPO4LMT application module. Group Mask Syntax RECAll:MASK <QString>...
Page 570 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order use of wildcard characters in ﬁlenames is not supported. Filename extensions are not required, but highly recommended. Examples recalls (and makes current) the oscilloscope setup RECALL:SETUP FACTORY to its factory defaults. recalls the oscilloscope setup from setup storage location 2. RECALL:SETUP 2 recalls the setup from the ﬁle TEK00000.SET RECALL:SETUP "TEK00000.SET"...
Page 571 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands SAVe:WAVEform, FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem? Arguments <Source> is one of: <file path> Speciﬁes an ISF (internal save format) or CSV (comma separated values) ﬁle. For CSV ﬁles containing multiple waveforms (created using :SAVe:WAVEform ALL), only the ﬁrst waveform column is recalled. Recalling digital waveforms to reference memory is not supported and attempting to recall a CSV ﬁle with only digital waveforms to REF1-4 results in an error event.
Page 572 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order REF<x>? (Query Only) This query returns data for the reference waveform speciﬁed by <x>. Group Vertical Syntax REF<x>? REF<x>:DATE? (Query Only) Returns the date that reference waveform data for reference waveform <x> was copied into the internal reference memory. Group Vertical Syntax...
Page 573 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Vertical Syntax REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3> REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the horizontal scale in seconds. <NR3> Examples might return REF1:? REF1: 4.0E-4 REF<x>:LABel This command speciﬁes the label for the reference waveform speciﬁed by <x>. Group Vertical Syntax...
Page 574 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order REF<x>:VERTical:POSition This command speciﬁes the vertical position of the reference waveform speciﬁed by <x>. Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up, and decreasing the position value causes the waveform to move down. Position adjusts only the display position of a waveform.
Page 575 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands CH<x>:SCAle, MATH[1]:VERTical:SCAle Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the gain in user units-per-division. <NR3> Examples sets the Reference 4 scale to 100 mV per REF4:VERTICAL:SCALE 100E-03 division. might return REF4:VERTICAL:SCALE? :REF2:VERTICAL:SCALE indicating that the current vertical scale setting for Reference 2 is 1.0000e+00 1 V per division.
Page 576 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 0 or OFF indicates that the RF input is not clipping. Examples might return 0, indicating that the RF input is not clipping. RF:CLIPPING? RF:DETECTionmethod:MODe This command speciﬁes whether the RF detection within the oscilloscope occurs automatically or manually.
Page 577 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order waveform into intervals and choosing a single value to represent each interval on screen. Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only. Group Syntax RF:DETECTionmethod:RF_AVErage {PLUSpeak|MINUSpeak|SAMple|AVErage} RF:DETECTionmethod:RF_AVErage? Related Commands RF:DETECTionmethod:MODe, RF:DETECTionmethod:RF_MAXHold, RF:DETECTionmethod:RF_MINHold, RF:DETECTionmethod:RF_NORMal Arguments...
Page 578 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only. Group Syntax RF:DETECTionmethod:RF_MAXHold {PLUSpeak|MINUSpeak|SAMple|AVErage} RF:DETECTionmethod:RF_MAXHold? Related Commands RF:DETECTionmethod:MODe, RF:DETECTionmethod:RF_AVErage, RF:DETECTionmethod:RF_MINHold, RF:DETECTionmethod:RF_NORMal Arguments — Detection method that selects the largest value in each interval. PLUSpeak —...
Page 579 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RF:DETECTionmethod:RF_MINHold? Related Commands RF:DETECTionmethod:MODe, RF:DETECTionmethod:RF_AVErage, RF:DETECTionmethod:RF_MAXHold, RF:DETECTionmethod:RF_NORMal Arguments — Detection method that selects the largest value in each interval. PLUSpeak — Detection method that selects the smallest value in each interval. MINUSpeak — Detection method that selects the ﬁrst point in each interval. SAMple —...
Page 580 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments — Detection method that selects the largest value in each interval. PLUSpeak — Detection method that selects the smallest value in each interval. MINUSpeak — Detection method that selects the ﬁrst point in each interval. SAMple —...
Page 581 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the center frequency to 3 MHz. RF:FREQuency 3.0E+06 might return 3.0E+06, indicating that the center frequency RF:FREQuency? has been set to 3 MHz. RF:LABel This command speciﬁes (or queries) a label for the RF frequency domain waveform.
Page 582 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax RF:MEASUre:ACPR:ADJACENTPAIRs[1|2|3] RF:MEASUre:ACPR:ADJACENTPAIRs? Related Commands RF:MEASUre:TYPe, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:CHANBW,RF:MEASUre:ACPR: CHANSPACing, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:POWer?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:LA1DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:LA2DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:LA3DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:UA1DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:UA2DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:UA3DB? Examples sets the number of adjacent pairs to RF:MEASUre:ACPR:ADJACENTPAIRs 2 use to 2. might return 3, indicating the number of RF:MEASUre:ACPR:ADJACENTPAIRs? adjacent pairs has been set to 3.
Page 583 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RF:MEASUre:ACPR:LA3DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:UA1DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:UA2DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:UA3DB? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number. <NR3> Examples sets the width to use for Main and side RF:MEASUre:ACPR:CHANBW 1.5E+6 channels to 1.5 MHz. might return 4.0000E+6, indicating the ACPR RF:MEASUre:ACPR:CHANBW? Main and side channel width is set to 4 MHz. RF:MEASUre:ACPR:CHANSPACing This command speciﬁes the center-to-center spacing between the Main channel and adjacent channels when performing ACPR measurements using a frequency...
Page 584 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the ACPR channel RF:MEASUre:ACPR:CHANSPACing 5.0000E+6 center-to-center spacing between the Main channel and the side channels to 5.0000E+6 MHz. might return 5.0000E+6, indicating the RF:MEASUre:ACPR:CHANSPACing? ACPR channel spacing has been set to 5 MHz. RF:MEASUre:ACPR:LA1DB? (Query Only) This query measures a ratio between the ﬁrst lower adjacent side channel and the Main channel when performing ACPR measurements.
Page 585 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only. Group Syntax RF:MEASUre:ACPR:LA2DB? Related Commands RF:MEASUre:ACPR:ADJACENTPAIRs, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:CHANBW, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:CHANSPACing, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:POWer?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:LA1DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:UA1DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:UA2DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:UA3DB? Examples might return –30.000, indicating that the Lower Area RF:MEASUre:ACPR:LA2DB 2 side channel (left side of Main channel) has 1/1000 the power of the Main channel.
Page 586 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return –30.000, indicating that the Lower Area RF:MEASUre:ACPR:LA3DB 3 side channel (left side of Main channel) has 1/1000 the power of the Main channel. If the main channel power is –41.0dBm and returns RF:MEASUre:ACPR:LA3DB –12.0 dB, then the actual power in the adjacent channel is –41.0dBm + –12.0 dB or –53.0dBm.
Page 587 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax RF:MEASUre:ACPR:UA1DB? Related Commands RF:MEASUre:ACPR:ADJACENTPAIRs, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:CHANBW, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:CHANSPACing, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:POWer?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:LA1DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:LA2DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:LA3DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:UA2DB?, RF:MEASUre:ACPR:UA3DB? Examples might return –30.000, indicating that the Upper RF:MEASUre:ACPR:UA1DB Area 1 side channel (right side of Main channel) has 1/1000 the power of the Main channel.
Page 588 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RF:MEASUre:ACPR:UA3DB? (Query Only) This query measures a ratio between the third upper side channel and the Main channel when performing ACPR measurements using a frequency domain trace. The power in the adjacent channel is equivalent to the power in the main channel (dBm) added to the power ratio (dB) of the adjacent channel.
Page 589 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands RF:MEASUre:CP:POWer? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number. <NR3> Examples 5.0000E+6 sets the channel width to 5 MHz. RF:MEASUre:CP:CHANBW RF:MEASUre:CP:POWer? (Query Only) This query returns the total channel power within the displayed channel bandwidth, when the RF measurement type has been set to CP (using the command RF:MEASUre:TYPe).
Page 590 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RF:MEASUre:OBW:LOWERFreq? (Query Only) This query returns the lower frequency threshold (on the display, the white line to the left bracketing OBW power). The RF measurement type must be set to OBW using the command RF:MEASUre:TYPe. Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only.
Page 591 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples 80 sets the OBW upper and lower frequencies RF:MEASUre:OBW:PERCENTdown such that 80% of the total power is contained within these two frequencies, with 20% remaining (10% on either side of these bounding frequencies). might return 85.0000, indicating that 85% of RF:MEASUre:OBW:PERCENTdown? the total power has been set to ﬁt within the occupied bandwidth.
Page 592 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands RF:MEASUre:OBW:CHANBW, RF:MEASUre:OBW:POWer?, RF:MEASUre:OBW:PERCENTdown, RF:MEASUre:OBW:LOWERFreq? Examples might return 2.4000E+9, indicating that the RF:MEASUre:OBW:UPPERFreq? upper frequency threshold is 2.4000E+9 Hz. If is 80%, then OBW:PERCENTdown (100%-80%)/2 or 10% of the total power will be above 2.4000E+9 Hz. RF:MEASUre:TYPe This command speciﬁes the RF measurement type: Channel Power, Adjacent Channel Power Ratio, Occupied Bandwidth, or none.
Page 593 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the RF measurement type to ACPR. RF:MEASUre:TYPe ACPR might return NONE, the default. RF:MEASUre:TYPe? RF:POSition This command speciﬁes the vertical position for the frequency domain traces. The vertical position is the location of the Reference Level with respect to the top of the graticule, in divisions.
Page 594 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples performs the AutoZero function in the probe. RF:PROBE:AUTOZERO EXECute RF:PRObe:CALibrate (No Query Form) This command executes a calibration or initialization for a probe attached to the RF input, if the probe is calibratable. To determine whether the probe is calibratable, use RF:PRObe:CALibrate:CALIBRATABLe?.
Page 595 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RF:PRObe:CALibrate:STATE? (Query Only) This command returns the calibration state of the probe connected to the RF input. Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only. Group Syntax RF:PRObe:CALibrate:STATE? Returns — Not calibrated DEFAULT —...
Page 596 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets a Tektronix VPI-DPG probe RF:PROBE:COMMAND “MODE”, “4–4V1MHz” to the 4-4V1MHz mode. turns the output of a Tektronix RF:PROBE:COMMAND “OUTPUT”, “ON” VPI-DPG probe on. might return RF:PROBE:COMMAND?“MODE” RF:PROBE:COMMAND “MODE”,“4-4V1MHZ” RF:PRObe:DEGAUss (No Query Form) This command starts a degauss/AutoZero cycle on a TekVPI current probe attached to the RF input.
Page 597 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order indicates the probe is degaussed. PASSED indicates the degauss operation failed. FAILED indicates the probe degauss operation is currently in progress. RUNNING Examples might return FAILED, indicating the degauss RF:PROBE:DEGAUSS:STATE? operation failed. RF:PRObe:FORCEDRange This command speciﬁes the range of a TekVPI probe attached to the RF input. Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only.
Page 598 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return indicating that RF:PROBE:GAIN? RF:PROBE:GAIN 0.1000E+00 the attached 10x probe delivers 1 V to the RF input for every 10 V applied to the probe input. RF:PRObe:ID:SERnumber? (Query Only) This query returns the serial number of the probe attached to the RF input. NOTE.
Page 599 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return indicating RF:PROBE:ID:TYPE? :RF:PROBE:ID:TYPE "P6203" that P6203-type probe is attached to the RF input. RF:PRObe:PREAmp:MODe Sets or returns the user-selected mode for an RF pre-amp connected to the RF input - either BYPass AUTO Note that the actual status of the pre-amp (either ) is...
Page 600 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RF:PRObe:PREAmp:STATus? (Query Only) Returns the actual status of the RF pre-amp connected to the RF input. The returned status enumerations are: – no pre-amp is connected. NONe – the pre-amp is connected and is in the ampliﬁcation (non-bypassed) state.
Page 601 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return RF:PRObe:RESistance? :RF:PROBE:RESISTANCE 1.0000E+6 indicating that the input resistance of the probe attached to the RF input is 1 MΩ. NOTE. This query will return 0.0 if no probe is attached or if the attached probe does not report the input resistance.
Page 602 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RF:RBW This command speciﬁes the resolution bandwidth (RBW) when the RBW mode has been set to MANUAL (using the command RF:RBW:MODe). The resolution bandwidth is the width of the narrowest measurable band of frequencies in a frequency domain trace.
Page 603 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (e.g. 10000, 20000, 50000). To specify the RBW ratio that will be used when the mode is set to automatic, use the command RF:SPANRbwratio. allows you to set the resolution bandwidth, independently from the span, MANual using the command RF:RBW.
Page 604 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax RF:RF_AMPlitude:LABel <QString> RF:RF_AMPlitude:LABel? Related Commands RF:RF_FREQuency:LABel, RF:RF_PHASe:LABel, RF:LABel Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 32 characters. RF:RF_AMPlitude:VERTical:POSition This command speciﬁes the vertical position of the RF Amplitude vs. Time trace. The position value determines the vertical graticule location at which the trace is displayed.
Page 605 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax RF:RF_AMPlitude:VERTical:SCAle <NR3> RF:RF_AMPlitude:VERTical:SCAle? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the vertical scale. <NR3> Examples sets the vertical scale to RF:RF_AMPlitude:VERTical:SCAle 50E-3 50mV/division. might return 10.0000E-3, indicating RF:RF_AMPlitude:VERTical:SCAle? that the vertical scale has been set to 10mV/division. RF:RF_AVErage:COUNt? (Query Only) This query returns the number of RF traces that have been accumulated to create the RF Average frequency domain trace.
Page 606 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax RF:RF_AVErage:NUMAVg <NR1> RF:RF_AVErage:NUMAVg? Related Commands RF:RF_AVErage:COUNt? Arguments is an integer. <NR1> Examples sets the number of acquisitions to be used for the RF:RF_AVErage:NUMAVg 100 RF average trace to 128 (the closest power of 2 increment). might return 16, indicating that the number of RF:RF_AVErage:NUMAVg? averages for the RF average trace has been set to 16.
Page 607 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions MDO4000/B/C models only. Group Syntax RF:RF_FREQuency:VERTical:POSition <NR3> RF:RF_FREQuency:VERTical:POSition? Related Commands RF:RF_FREQuency:VERTical:SCAle Arguments is a ﬂoating point number. <NR3> Examples sets the vertical position of the RF:RF_FREQuency:VERTical:POSition —1 RF Frequency vs. Time trace to –1 division. might return 0.0E+0, indicating a RF:RF_FREQuency:VERTical:POSition? vertical position of 0.
Page 608 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return 1.0000E+6, indicating RF:RF_FREQuency:VERTical:SCAle? that the vertical scale has been set to 1 MHz/division. RF:RF_PHASe:LABel This command speciﬁes the label for the RF Phase vs. Time trace. Conditions MDO4000/B/C models only. Group Syntax RF:RF_PHASe:LABel <QString> RF:RF_PHASe:LABel? Related Commands RF:RF_AMPlitude:LABel, RF:RF_FREQuency:LABel,...
Page 609 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions MDO4000/B/C models only. Group Syntax RF:RF_PHASe:VERTical:POSition <NR3> RF:RF_PHASe:VERTical:POSition? Related Commands RF:RF_PHASe:VERTical:SCAle Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the vertical position. <NR3> Examples sets the vertical position of the RF RF:RF_PHASe:VERTical:POSition —1 Phase vs. Time trace to –1 division. might return 0.0E+0, indicating a RF:RF_PHASe:VERTical:POSition? vertical position of 0.
Page 610 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RF:RF_PHASe:WRAP:DEGrees Sets or returns the number of degrees to wrap the RF_PHASe time domain trace. The value can range from –180.0 to 54,000.0 degrees. The default is 360.0 degrees and the resolution is 180.0 degrees. Conditions MDO models only Group...
Page 611 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RF:SCAle This command speciﬁes the overall vertical scale setting of the frequency domain window. The lower limit is 0.1 dB/division. The upper limit is 100dB/division. The vertical scale is adjustable in a 1–2–5 sequence. Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only.
Page 612 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax RF:SPAN <NR3> RF:SPAN? Related Commands RF:FREQuency, RF:STARt, RF:STOP Arguments is a ﬂoating point number. <NR3> Examples sets the span to 2 GHz. RF:SPAN 2E9 might return 10.0000E+6, indicating the span is 10MHz. RF:SPAN? RF:SPANRbwratio This command speciﬁes the ratio of the span to the resolution bandwidth (RBW) that will be used when the RBW Mode is set to AUTO.
Page 613 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RF:SPECTRogram (No Query Form) Clears the spectrogram. Conditions Available for MDO4000/B/C and MDO3000 series models only. Group Syntax RF:SPECTRogram {CLEAR} Arguments clears the spectrogram. CLEAR Examples clears the spectrogram. RF:SPECTR CLEAR RF:SPECTRogram:NUMSLICEs? (Query Only) This query returns the number of spectrogram slices that are currently being rendered.
Page 614 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order running, are ignored. The query form returns the currently selected spectrogram slice. To use this command, ﬁrst turn on the spectrogram (RF:SPECTRogram:STATE). Then query the number of slices (RF:SPECTRogram:NUMSLICEs?). Stop the acquisition when you’ve reached the number of desired slices. Then select the slice to display (RF:SPECTRogram:SLICESELect).
Page 615 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RF:SPECTRogram:SLICETIMe? (Query Only) Returns the time stamp of the selected spectrogram slice (speciﬁed using :RF:SPECTRogram:SLICESELect). The value represents the number of seconds since spectrogram acquisitions were started after the instrument was powered up, or since the spectrogram was cleared (see RF:SPECTRogram).
Page 616 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return 0, indicating that the spectrogram RF:SPECTRogram:STATE? function is off. RF:SPECTRogram:TIMe? (Query Only) Queries the number of seconds in the spectrogram since continuous acquisition started. The value returned is always <= 0. Group Syntax RF:SPECTRogram:TIMe? Examples might return -66.8174, indicating that there were...
Page 617 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments ties RF acquisitions to the scope's uniﬁed triggering system for all TRIGgered channels. acquires RF data as often as processing allows, without waiting for FREErun trigger events. Examples sets the RF spectrum mode to TRIGgered. RF:SPECTRUMMode TRIG might return FREERUN, indicating the spectrum mode RF:SPECTRUMMode?
Page 618 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples turns the squelch control on. RF:SQUELCH:STATE ON might return 0, indicating that squelch has been turned off. RF:SQUELCH:STATE? RF:SQUELCH:THReshold This command speciﬁes the squelch threshold level, in volts, for the RF Frequency vs. Time and RF Phase vs. Time traces. Conditions MDO4000/B/C models only.
Page 619 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax RF:STARt <NR3> RF:STARt? Arguments is a ﬂoating point value that represents the Start frequency. <NR3> Examples speciﬁes to exclude frequencies below 0 Hz from use. RF:STARt 0 might return 0.0E+0, indicating that the Start frequency is 0 Hz. RF:STARt? RF:STOP This command speciﬁes to exclude frequencies above a certain level from use.
Page 620 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RF:UNIts This command speciﬁes the vertical units to be used in all RF-related absolute logarithmic amplitudes. Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only. Group Syntax RF:UNIts {DBM|DBUW|DBMV|DBUV|DBMA|DBUA} RF:UNIts? Arguments — Decibel milliwatts. —...
Page 621 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax RF:WINdow {RECTangular|HAMming|HANning|BLAckmanharris|KAIser|FLATtop} RF:WINdow? Arguments — window function equivalent to multiplying all gate data by one RECTangular (sometimes known as a Dirichlet window). — a high or moderate resolution window based on a cosine series. HAMming —...
Page 622 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes to use the internal 10 MHz crystal oscillator as the time INTERnal base reference. speciﬁes to use a user-supplied external signal as the time base EXTernal reference. Examples might return , indicating that the 10 MHz crystal ROSC:SOURCE? INTERNAL oscillator is being used as the time base reference.
Page 623 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Status and Error Syntax *RST Related Commands FACtory, RECAll:SETUp, SAVe:SETUp, *PSC, *RCL, *SAV Arguments None Examples resets the oscilloscope settings to factory defaults. *RST *SAV (No Query Form) Stores the state of the oscilloscope to a speciﬁed memory location. You can use the *RCL command to restore the oscilloscope to this saved state at a later time.
Page 624 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SAVe:ASSIgn:TYPe This command speciﬁes the assignment of the data to be saved when the front-panel Save button is pressed. Group Save and Recall Syntax SAVe:ASSIgn:TYPe {IMAGe|WAVEform|SETUp} SAVe:ASSIgn:TYPe? Arguments assigns the Save button to save screen images. IMAGe assigns the Save button to save waveforms.
Page 625 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. <ﬁlename> stands for a ﬁlename of up to 125 characters, followed by a period (".") and the three-character extension. Waveform ﬁles should have a .csv extension for comma-separated spreadsheet format ﬁles. SAVe:IMAGe (No Query Form) Saves a capture of the screen image to the speciﬁed ﬁle.
Page 626 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Save and Recall Syntax SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat {PNG|BMP|TIFf} SAVe:IMAGe:FILEFormat? Related Commands SAVe:IMAGe Arguments saves the ﬁle in Portable Network Graphics format. saves the ﬁle in Microsoft Windows bitmap format. saves the ﬁle in Tagged Image File Format. TIFf SAVe:IMAGe:INKSaver This command speciﬁes the current ink saver setting for the...
Page 627 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes that screen images are saved in landscape format. LANdscape speciﬁes that screen images are saved in portrait format. PORTRait SAVe:MASK (No Query Form) This command saves the current mask deﬁnition to the ﬁle speciﬁed with a quoted string, into the current working directory.
Page 628 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. External ﬁle structure is as follows: E: is the USB memory device plugged into the ﬁrst USB port on the front of the oscilloscope. F: is the USB memory device plugged into the second USB port on the front of the oscilloscope.
Page 629 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Menu->save waveform menu. The type of ﬁle saved is dependent upon the SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat command. For instruments with the arbitrary waveform feature, the source can be arbitrary waveform edit memory (EMEM) or one of the internal arbitrary waveform locations (ARB1 - ARB4).
Page 630 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order from the instrument. Please reference the MAT-File Format document for detailed information about the ﬁle header and data elements. The 128-byte header is comprised of the following ﬁelds: Descriptive Text (116 bytes): MATLAB 5.0 MAT-ﬁle, Platform: <ID>, Created on: <date> where: <ID>...
Page 631 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Type of Array Flags (4 bytes) = miUINT32 (6) Size of Array Flags (4 bytes) = 8 Array Flags (8 bytes) = 0 0 0 mxDOUBLE_CLASS=6 0 0 0 0 Dimensions Array Type (4 bytes) = miINT32 (5) Dimensions Array Length (4 bytes) = 8 X Dimension (4 bytes) = 1 Y Dimension (4 bytes) = 1...
Page 632 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Array Name Length (string length of name - e.g. 6 for IQData) Array Name (including pad bytes which are 0's) (see Array Size above) Array Data Element Type (4 bytes) = miSINGLE (7) Size of Array (4 bytes) = (IQ record length) * 4 The I data values as 4-byte ﬂoating point values Pad Bytes: 0 or more 0 bytes to end the record on an 8-byte boundary The Q data is written next:...
Page 633 .TIQ ﬁle extension. You can import .TIQ ﬁles into Tektronix SignalVu-PC software (PC based), SignalVu software (oscilloscope based), RSAVu software (PC based) or into a Tektronix real-time spectrum analyzer for pulse analysis and demodulation analysis. - Speciﬁes all displayed waveforms subject to the restrictions indicated in the note below for saving ALL waveforms.
Page 634 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ﬁles or a .csv extension for comma-separated value format ﬁles. The ﬁleformat is speciﬁed using the SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat:RF_BB_IQ command. Examples saves the CH1 waveform to reference memory SAVE:WAVEFORM CH1,REF1 location 1. SAVE:WAVEFORM ALL,"E:/test_folder/test1_all.csv" saves all displayed waveforms (excluding serial bus waveforms) to when the ﬁle format is set to E:/test_folder/test1_all.csv SPREADSHEET.
Page 635 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes to save waveforms using an internal format. The ﬁle name INTERNal should be speciﬁed with .ISF ﬁlename extension. These ﬁles can be recalled as reference waveforms. speciﬁes that waveform data is saved in a format that contains SPREADSheet comma delimited values.
Page 636 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Save and Recall Syntax SAVe:WAVEform:GATIng {NONe|CURSors|SCREEN} SAVe:WAVEform:GATIng? Arguments turns on cursors and the gates are the waveform record points at the CURSors cursor positions. saves the entire waveform. NONe , if zoom is on, the gates are the start and end waveform record points of SCREEN the zoom (upper) graticule, otherwise the gates are the start and end waveform record points of the main graticule.
Page 637 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order STAR;DAT:VAL "XXXXXXXX";SIZ 1;DIR NOCARE;:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIG:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDR:MOD ADDR7;TYP USER;VAL "XXXXXXX" ;:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIG:A:BUS:B2:CAN:COND SOF;FRAME DATA;DAT:VAL "XXXXXXXX";SIZ 1;DIR NOCARE;QUAL EQU; :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIG:A:BUS:B2:CAN:ID:MOD ST;VAL "XXXXXXXXXXX";:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIG:A:BUS:SOU B1;:SEA RCH:SEARCH1:TRIG:A:TYP EDG;LEV 0.0000;LEV:CH1 0.0000;CH2 0.0000;CH3 0.0000;CH4 0.0000;MATH 0.0000;RE F1 0.0000;REF2 0.0000;REF3 0.0000;REF4 0.0000;:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIG:A:UPP:CH1 800.0000E-3;CH2 800.000 0E-3;CH3 800.0000E-3;CH4 800.0000E-3;MATH 800.0000E-3;REF1 800.0000E-3;REF2 800.0000E-3;REF3 800.000 0E-3;REF4 800.0000E-3;:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIG:A:LOW:CH1 0.0000;CH2 0.0000;CH3 0.0000;CH4 0.0000;MATH 0.
Page 638 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:LIST? (Query Only) This query returns a list of all automatically created search marks on waveforms in the time domain (leaving out any manually created marks). These automatic marks are created using a search command. The entries returned are in the form of an enumeration representing the source waveform, followed by 7 time mark parameters.
Page 639 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:STATE Sets the search state to on or off. <x> is the search number, which is always 1. The query form returns the search state. A series of example command sequences showing different searches and triggers is included as an appendix.
Page 640 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. Parallel bus commands work with MSO4000B Series, MDO4000/B/C Series, and MDO3000 Series oscilloscopes only. Conditions For I C or SPI bus signals, install the DPO4EMBD application module, except for MDO3000 models, which require MDO3EMBD. For RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, or UART bus signals, install the DPO4COMP module, except for MDO3000 models, which require MDO3COMP.
Page 641 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes the LIN bus. speciﬁes the FlexRay bus. FLEXRay speciﬁes the audio bus. AUDio speciﬁes the Ethernet bus. ETHERnet speciﬁes the MIL-STD-1553 bus. MIL1553B Examples might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS? SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:CONDITION SS;:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:CONDITION SS;:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B3:SPI:CONDITION SS;:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B4:SPI:CONDITION SS;:SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:MOSI:VALUE "XX" SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:CONDition This command sets the condition (word start, label, matching data, word end, or error) to be used to search on ARINC429 bus data.
Page 642 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes a search for matching packet data ﬁeld(s). DATA speciﬁes a search for matching label and matching packet data LABELANDDATA ﬁeld(s). speciﬁes a search for speciﬁed packet error. ERROR NOTE. The type of error searched for is speciﬁed by SEARCH:SEARCH<x>: TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:ERRTYPE Examples...
Page 643 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments QString is a quoted string of 19, 21, or 23 bits. The allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged. NOTE.
Page 644 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the data qualiﬁer to equal. EQual sets the data qualiﬁer to not equal. UNEQual sets the data qualiﬁer to less than or equal. LESSEQual sets the data qualiﬁer to greater than or equal. MOREEQual sets the data qualiﬁer to in range.
Page 645 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments QString is a quoted string of 19, 21, or 23 bits. The allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged. NOTE.
Page 646 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:ERRTYPE ANY error type to match any of the other available error types. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:ERRTYPE? PARity. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:HIVALue When the search condition is set to LABel, and the qualiﬁer is set to either INrange or OUTrange, this command speciﬁes the upper value of the range for a match on the label ﬁeld.
Page 647 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:QUALiﬁer This command speciﬁes the qualiﬁer to be used when searching on the ARINC429 label ﬁeld. The search condition must be set to LABel or LABELANDDATA. The default qualiﬁer is "Equal to". SEARCH<x> is the search number, which is always 1.
Page 648 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:QUALifier? might return EQUAL indicating the label qualiﬁer is set to =. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:VALue This command speciﬁes the low value to be used when searching on the ARINC429 bus label ﬁeld. The search condition must be set to LABel or LABELANDDATA (using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>: ARINC429A:CONDition).
Page 649 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires installation of a DPO4AERO application module for MDO4000C models, or MDO3AERO for MDO3000 models. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SDI <QString> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SDI? Related Commands BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA:FORMAT SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:CONDition Arguments QString is a quoted string of 2 bits. The allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged.
Page 650 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA:FORMAT SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:CONDition Arguments QString is a quoted string of 2 bits. The allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged. NOTE.
Page 651 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order search on the lower word value.) The search condition must be set to DATA using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition. is the search number, which is always 1, and SEARCH<x> B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUDIO application module on DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models and a MDO3AUDIO application module on MDO3000 models.
Page 652 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:QUALiﬁer This command sets the qualiﬁer (<, >, =, <=, >=, not =, in range, out of range) to be used to search on audio bus data. The search condition must be set to DATA using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition.
Page 653 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:VALue <String> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:VALue? Arguments <String> is the lower word value. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:WORD This command sets the alignment of the data (left, right or either) to be used to search on audio bus data. The search condition must be set to DATA using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition.
Page 654 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4AUTOMAX application module on DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models and a MDO3AUTO application module on MDO3000 models. FORMERRor, ANYERRor, FDBRS, and FDESI are only supported on MDO3000 and MDO4000C models and available only when :BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard is set to CANFD Group...
Page 655 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4AUTOMAX application module on DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models and a MDO3AUTO application module on MDO3000 models. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection {READ|WRITE|NOCARE} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition Arguments speciﬁes the read direction. READ speciﬁes the write direction.
Page 656 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a number specifying the data offset. It can be set to -1 to 7 for CAN 2.0 <NR1> and -1 to 63 for CAN FD. These ranges are modiﬁed by the following: A value of -1 signiﬁes “don’t care” and the instrument will match any byte value that satisfy the match criteria.
Page 657 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier {LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual|EQual} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue Arguments searches for bus data less than the value speciﬁed by LESSthan SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue. searches for bus data greater than the value speciﬁed by MOREthan SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue. searches for bus data equal to the value speciﬁed by SEARCH: EQual SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue.
Page 658 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue This command sets the binary data value to be used to search on CAN bus data. This only applies if the search condition has been set to IDANDDATA or DATA (using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). is the search number, which is always 1, and SEARCH<x>...
Page 659 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments , and specify that the BRS bit must have value 0. If queried, the ZERo command will always return 0 if set with these arguments. specify that the BRS bit must have value 1. If queried, the , and command will always return 1 if set with these arguments.
Page 660 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order set to FRAMEtype (using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN: CONDition). is the search number, which is always 1, and is the bus number SEARCH<x> B<x> (1-4). 1-3 for the MDO4000C and 1-2 for the MDO3000. Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4AUTOMAX application module on DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models and a MDO3AUTO application module on MDO3000 models.
Page 661 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes an 11-bit identiﬁer ﬁeld. STandard speciﬁes a 29-bit identiﬁer ﬁeld. EXTended SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentiﬁer|:ADDRess}:VALue This command sets the binary address value to be used to search on CAN bus data. This only applies if the search condition has been set to IDANDDATA or DATA (using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition).
Page 662 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Most of the other SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet commands are impacted by the setting of this command. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:PROTOcol Arguments — Start of frame delimiter ﬁeld. — MAC addresses ﬁeld. MACADDRess — MAC length/type ﬁeld. MACLENgth —...
Page 663 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue <QString> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QUALiﬁer SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue Arguments is a quoted string whose length varies depending on the size setting, up QString to 32 bits. (Use the command SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>: ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe to specify size.) The allowable characters are 0, 1, and X.
Page 664 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue Arguments is an integer. The minimum and default values are -1 (don't care) and the maximum is 1,499. Examples sets SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet 36 the data offset to 36 bytes. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet? return –1, indicating that the data offset value is the default value, –1, meaning “don’t care”.
Page 665 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue When the search condition is set to , and the qualiﬁer is set to DATa LESSthan, MOREthan, EQual, UNEQual, LESSEQual MOREEQual this command speciﬁes the value to search for. When the search condition is set to , and the qualiﬁer is set to this DATa...
Page 666 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:FRAMETYPe This command speciﬁes which Ethernet frame type to search for: either Basic or QTAG (IEEE 802.1Q, or VLAN tagging). The default is Basic. is the SEARCH<x> search number, which is always 1, and is the bus number 1-4. 1-3 for the B<x>...
Page 667 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4ENET application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader: PROTOcol:VALue <QString> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader: PROTOcol:VALue? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader: SOUrceaddr:VALue SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIG:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHER:IPH:DEST:VAL Arguments is a quoted string of up to 8 characters where the allowable characters QString are 0, 1, and X.
Page 668 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader: SOUrceaddr:VALue <QString> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader: SOUrceaddr:VALue? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader: PROTOcol:VALue SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIG:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHER:IPH:DEST:VAL Arguments is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable characters QString are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged.
Page 669 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader: PROTOcol:VALue SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader: SOUrceaddr:VALue Arguments is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable characters QString are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged.
Page 670 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a quoted string of up to 48 characters where the allowable characters QString are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged. Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess: SOUrce:VALue...
Page 671 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:MAC: ADDRess:DESTination:VALue ”XXXXXXXXXX01010111111100000001111010101010101000” would set the MAC destination address to search for to XX:35:FC:07:AA:C8 hex. SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess: might return ”XXXXXXXXXX010101111111000 DESTination:VALue? 00001111010101010101000”. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC{:LENgth|:TYPe}:VALue When the Ethernet search condition is set to , and the MACLENgth qualiﬁer is set to LESSthan, MOREthan, EQual, UNEQual, this command speciﬁes the 16–bit value...
Page 672 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order to search on to the hexadecimal value XX08, assuming the qualiﬁer is set to LESSthan, MOREthan, EQual, UNEQual, LESSEQual MOREEQual. SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:MAC{:LENgth| sets the lower limit of the range to the :TYPe}:VALue “XXXXXXXX00001000” hexadecimal value XX08, assuming the qualiﬁer is set to INrange OUTrange.
Page 673 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:ETHERNET:MAC{:LENGTH| might return “XXXXXXXX00001000”. :TYPE}:HIVALUE? SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QTAG:VALue When the Ethernet search condition is set to , this command speciﬁes the QTAG 32–bit QTAG value to search for. The default is all X’s (don’t care). SEARCH<x> is the search number, which is always 1, and is the bus number B1-B4.
Page 674 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QUALifier {LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual |INrange|OUTrange} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QUALifier? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC{:LENgth|: TYPe}:?HIVALue SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:QUALifier LESSthan sets the qualiﬁer to less than. MACLENgth or DATa SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue When the Ethernet search condition is set to , this command speciﬁes TCPHeader the 32–bit acknowledgement value that is to be used in the search (along with the destination and source port addresses and the sequence number).
Page 675 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader: SEQnum:VALue Arguments is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable characters QString are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged. Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue sets the acknowledgement number to be...
Page 676 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue would set the sequence number “XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX000100010001” that is to be used in the search to hexadecimal XXXXX111. SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue? might return "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX0010010100" . SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIG:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHER:TCPH:DEST:VAL When the Ethernet search condition is set to , this command speciﬁes TCPHeader the 16–bit destination port address that is to be used in the search (along with the acknowledgement value, source port address and the sequence number).
Page 677 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIG:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHER:TCPH:SOU:VAL When the Ethernet search condition is set to , this command speciﬁes TCPHEADER the 16–bit source port address that is to be used in the search (along with the destination port address, the sequence number and the acknowledgement number). The default is all X’s (don’t care).
Page 678 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order is the search number, which is always 1, and is the bus number SEARCH<x> B<x> B1–B4, except for MDO3000, which has two buses B1–B2. Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTOMAX application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3FLEX application module for MDO3000 models.
Page 679 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTOMAX application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3FLEX application module for MDO3000 models. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount: HIVALue <QString> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount: HIVALue? Arguments is a quoted string that is the cycle count high value. <QString>...
Page 680 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments LESSthan sets the cycle count qualiﬁer to less than. MOREthan sets the cycle count qualiﬁer to greater than. EQual sets the cycle count qualiﬁer to equal. UNEQual sets the cycle count qualiﬁer to not equal. LESSEQual sets the cycle count qualiﬁer to less than or equal.
Page 681 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:VALUE? might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:VALUE indicating the cycle count value is don't cares. "XXXXXX" SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:HIVALue This command speciﬁes the high value to use when searching on the FlexRay bus data ﬁeld. The search condition needs to be set to ID or IDANDDATA (using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: CONDition).
Page 682 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTOMAX application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3FLEX application module for MDO3000 models. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:OFFSet <NR1> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:OFFSet? Arguments is the data offset in bytes. A byte offset of -1 signiﬁes don't care, and no <NR1>...
Page 683 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the data qualiﬁer to less than. LESSthan sets the data qualiﬁer to greater than. MOREthan sets the data qualiﬁer to equal. EQual sets the data qualiﬁer to not equal. UNEQual sets the data qualiﬁer to less than or equal. LESSEQual sets the data qualiﬁer to greater than or equal.
Page 684 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:SIZE? indicating SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:SIZE 1 the data size is 1 byte. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:VALue This command speciﬁes the low value to use when searching on the FlexRay bus data ﬁeld. The search condition needs to be set to ID or IDANDDATA (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition).
Page 685 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTOMAX application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3FLEX application module for MDO3000 models. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:EOFTYPE {STATic|DYNAMic|ANY} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:EOFTYPE? Arguments sets the FlexRay end of frame type to STATIC. STATic sets the FlexRay end of frame type to DYNAMIC.
Page 686 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the error type to CRC header. CRCHeader sets the error type to CRC trailer. CRCTrailer sets the error type to sync frame. SYNCFrame sets the error type to start up with no sync. STARTupnosync sets the error type to null frame static.
Page 687 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALUE indicating the frame id high value is don't cares. "XXXXXXXXXXX" SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:QUALiﬁer This command speciﬁes the qualiﬁer to use when searching on the FlexRay bus frame ID ﬁeld. The search condition needs to be set to IDentiﬁer (using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition).
Page 688 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:VALue This command speciﬁes the low value to use when searching on the FlexRay bus frame ID ﬁeld. (Use SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: FRAMEID:HIVALue to set the high value.) The search condition needs to be set to IDentiﬁer (using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: CONDition).
Page 689 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEType {NORMal|PAYLoad|NULL|SYNC|STARTup} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEType? Arguments sets the frame type to normal. NORMal sets the frame type to payload. PAYLoad sets the frame type to NULL. NULL sets the frame type to sync. SYNC sets the frame type to start up. STARTup Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMETYPE STARTUP...
Page 690 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC? return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:CRC indicating the CRC protion of the binary header string is don't "XXXXXXXXXXX" cares. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:CYCLEcount This command speciﬁes to use the cycle count portion of the binary header string when searching on the FlexRay bus header. The search condition needs to be set to HEADer (using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray: CONDition).
Page 691 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTOMAX application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3FLEX application module for MDO3000 models. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:FRAMEID <QString> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:FRAMEID? Arguments is a quoted string representing the frame ID portion of the binary <QString>...
Page 692 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBITS sets the indicator bits of the header to 10100. ”10100” might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBITS? return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:INDBITS indicating the indicator bits of the header are don't cares. "XXXXX" SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:PAYLength This command speciﬁes to use the payload length portion of the binary header string when searching on the FlexRay bus header.
Page 693 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3EMBD application module for MDO3000 models. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe {ADDR7|ADDR10} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe? Arguments speciﬁes 7-bit addresses. ADDR7 speciﬁes 10-bit addresses. ADDR10 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe This command speciﬁes the I2C address type to be used in an I2C search.
Page 694 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue This command speciﬁes the address value to be used in an I2C search if the search condition is (address and data). is the ADDRess ADDRANDDATA SEARCH<x> search number, which is always 1, and B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3EMBD application module for...
Page 695 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes a search based on an address. ADDRess speciﬁes a search based on a data condition. DATA speciﬁes a search based on an address and data condition. ADDRANDDATA SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection This command speciﬁes the data direction to use for an I2C search: either read, write, or either.
Page 696 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition Arguments is the data string length in bytes. <NR1> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue This command speciﬁes the data value to be used in an I2C search, if the search condition is set to (address and data). is the DATA ADDRANDDATA...
Page 697 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes to search on the sync ﬁeld. SYNCField speciﬁes to search on the identiﬁer. IDentifier speciﬁes to search on the data. DATA speciﬁes to search on the identiﬁer and the data. IDANDDATA speciﬁes to search on wake up. WAKEup speciﬁes to search on sleep.
Page 698 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALiﬁer This command speciﬁes the LIN data qualiﬁer. This only applies if the search condition is set to (identiﬁer and data). IDentifier IDANDDATA SEARCH<x> is the search number, which is always 1, and B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3AUTO application module for MDO3000 models.
Page 699 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe This command speciﬁes the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used in a LIN search, if the search condition is set to (identiﬁer IDentifier IDANDDATA and data). is the search number, which is always 1, and SEARCH<x>...
Page 700 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition Arguments is the binary data string for the search. <QString> Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE? might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" indicating the data value is don't care. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE This command speciﬁes the error type used for a LIN search. is the SEARCH<x>...
Page 701 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentiﬁer:VALue This command speciﬁes the binary address string used for LIN search if search condition is set to (identiﬁer and data). IDentifier IDANDDATA SEARCH<x> is the search number, which is always 1, and B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3AUTO application module for MDO3000 models.
Page 702 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND: ADDRess:HIVALue <QString> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND: ADDRess:HIVALue? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIG:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDR: QUAL SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND: ADDRess:VALue Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 5 characters where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. Examples “01000” sets SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:HIVALue the upper limit of the remote terminal address range to 01000 (when the search condition has been set to...
Page 703 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND: ADDRess:VALue? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND: ADDRess:HIVALue SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIG:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDR: QUAL Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 5 characters, where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess: sets the remote terminal address to be used in the search to VALue “01000”...
Page 704 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the Command Address qualiﬁer to less than. LESSthan sets the Command Address qualiﬁer to greater than. MOREthan sets the Command Address qualiﬁer to equal. EQual sets the Command Address qualiﬁer to not equal. UNEQual sets the Command Address qualiﬁer to less than or equal.
Page 705 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND: SUBADdress SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBit Arguments is a quoted string of up to 5 characters, where the allowable characters QString are 0, 1 and X. Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNt sets the bit pattern for the Word Count/Mode Code ﬁeld to 01000. “01000”...
Page 706 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the value to 0. sets the value to 1. Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARity ZERo sets the Command word parity bit to 0. SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARity? might return 0, 1 or X. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADdress When the MIL-STD-1553 bus search condition is set to , this command COMMAND speciﬁes the 5 bit sub-address that is to be used in the search.
Page 707 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND: sets the sub-address to be used in the search to 01000. SUBADdress “01000” SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBit When the MIL-STD-1553 bus search condition is set to , this command COMMAND speciﬁes that the transmit/receive bit (bit 9) is to be used in the search. The transmit/receive bit deﬁnes the direction of information ﬂow, and is always from the point of view of the remote terminal.
Page 708 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. There are three types of MIL-STD-1553 (Aircraft) bus words: Command, Status, and Data, all sharing a common structure twenty bits in length. The ﬁrst three bits are used as a synchronization ﬁeld. The last bit is the odd parity of the previous 16 bits.
Page 709 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. Use the SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition:STATus:BIT commands to set the following bits: 9 — message error SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:ME 10 — instrumentation SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:INSTR 11 — SRQ (service request) SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SRQ 15 — BCR (broadcast command received) SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BCR 16 — busy SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BUSY 17 —...
Page 710 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa:PARity {0|1|X|ZERo|ONE|NOCARE|OFF|ON} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa:PARity? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa:VALue Arguments sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. sets the value to 0. ZERO sets the value to 1. sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. NOCARE sets the value to 0.
Page 711 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa:PARity Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 16 characters, where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:DATa:VALue “01000” sets the data binary pattern to be used in a MIL-STD-1553 bus search to 01000. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:DATa:VALue? return XXXXXXXXXXX01000.
Page 712 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:ERRTYPE? SYNC. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:HIVALue When the MIL-STD-1553 bus search condition is set to , and the qualiﬁer STATus is set to , this command speciﬁes the upper limit for INrange OUTrange the 5 bit remote terminal address ﬁeld of the Status word. (Use the command TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:VALue to specify the lower limit.) The default is all X’s (don’t care).
Page 713 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:QUALiﬁer When the MIL-STD-1553 bus search condition is set to , this command STATus speciﬁes the qualiﬁer to be used with the address ﬁeld. is the search SEARCH<x> number, which is always 1, and B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4AERO application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3AERO application module for...
Page 714 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess: sets the qualiﬁer to be used with the address ﬁeld to QUALifier MOREthan greater than. SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess: might return MORETHAN. QUALifier? SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:VALue When the MIL-STD-1553 bus search condition is set to , and the STATus qualiﬁer is set to LESSthan, MOREthan, EQual, UNEQual, LESSEQual...
Page 715 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order the search, when the qualiﬁer has been set to LESSthan, MOREthan, EQual, UNEQual, LESSEQual MOREEQual SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess: sets the lower limit of the range to 01000, if the qualiﬁer has VALue "01000" been set to INrange OUTrange.
Page 716 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BCR sets the BCR bit value to be used in the search to X. NOCARE SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BCR? might return 1. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BUSY When the MIL-STD-1553 bus search condition is set to , this command STATus speciﬁes the status word busy bit value (bit 16) to be used in the search. Returned values are 0, 1, or X (don’t care, which is the default).
Page 717 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BUSY? might return 1. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:DBCA When the MIL-STD-1553 bus search condition is set to , this command STATus speciﬁes the status word dynamic bus control acceptance (DBCA) bit value (bit 18) to be used in the search. Returned values are 0, 1, or X (don’t care, which is the default).
Page 718 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:INSTR When the MIL-STD-1553 bus search condition is set to , this command STATus speciﬁes the status word instrumentation bit value (bit 10) to be used in the search. Returned values are 0, 1, or X (don’t care, which is the default). SEARCH<x>...
Page 719 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:ME When the MIL-STD-1553 bus search condition is set to , this command STATus speciﬁes the status word message error bit value (bit 9) to be used in the search. Returned values are 0, 1, or X (don’t care, which is the default). SEARCH<x>...
Page 720 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order in the search. Returned values are 0, 1, or X (don’t care, which is the default). is the search number, which is always 1, and SEARCH<x> B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4AERO application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3AERO application module for MDO3000 models.
Page 721 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition Arguments sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. sets the value to 0. ZERO sets the value to 1. sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. NOCARE sets the value to 0.
Page 722 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. sets the value to 0. ZERO sets the value to 1. sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. NOCARE sets the value to 0.
Page 723 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the value to 0. ZERO sets the value to 1. sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. NOCARE sets the value to 0. sets the value to 1. Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATus:PARity sets the parity bit value to be used in the search to SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATus:PARity? might return X, indicating that the parity doesn’t matter.
Page 724 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:TIMe:LESSLimit? might return 2.0000e-6, indicating that the RT or IMG has been set to 2.00 μS. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:MORELimit When the MIL-STD-1553 bus search condition is set to , this command TIMe speciﬁes either the maximum remote terminal response time (RT) limit for the amount of time the terminal has to transmit, or it speciﬁes the maximum inter-message gap (IMG).
Page 725 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AERO application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3AERO application module for MDO3000 models. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:QUALifier {LESSthan|MOREthan|INrange|OUTrange} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:QUALifier? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:LESSLimit SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:MORELimit Arguments sets the Time qualiﬁer to less than minimum. LESSthan sets the Time qualiﬁer to greater than maximum MOREthan...
Page 726 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition This command speciﬁes the condition to be used in an RS-232 search. SEARCH<x> is the search number, which is always 1, and B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4COMP application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3COMP application module for MDO3000 models.
Page 727 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition Arguments is the length of the data string in Bytes. <NR1> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue This command speciﬁes the data value to be used in an RS-232 search, if the condition is set to is the search number, which is always RXDATA.
Page 728 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the length of the data string in Bytes. <NR1> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:VALue This command speciﬁes the data value to be used for an RS-232 search, if the condition is set to is the search number, which is always RXDATA SEARCH<x>...
Page 729 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes a search based on the Slave Selection condition. is applicable when is set to STARTofframe BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING . When the search condition is set to , the instrument IDLEtime STARTofframe searches on the ﬁrst SPI clock after an idle time when there are no clocks. speciﬁes a search based on the Master-In Slave-Out condition.
Page 730 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MOSI|:OUT}: VALue <bin> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:MOSI|:OUT}: VALue? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition Arguments is the data in binary format. <bin> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe This command speciﬁes the length of the data string to be used in an SPI search, if the search condition is , or is the search...
Page 731 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires the DPO4USB application module to be installed, except for MDO3000 models, which require the MDO3USB. Note that 1 GHz bandwidth models are recommended for high-speed (HS) USB. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:HIVALue <QString>...
Page 732 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments within the range 0000000 to 1111111 (00 hex to 7F hex). <QString> Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE “0001000” sets the binary address to 0001000 (08 hex). might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE? :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE “1000000” which indicates that the binary address is 100000 (40 hex). SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition This command speciﬁes the search condition for a USB search.
Page 733 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:CONDITION TOKENPACKET the search condition to be a token packet. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:CONDITION? , which :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:CONDITION SYNC indicates that the search condition is a sync ﬁeld. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:HIVALue This command speciﬁes the upper limit data value for the inside-of-range and outside-of-range qualiﬁers to be used in a USB search, when the search condition is set to .
Page 734 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires the DPO4USB application module to be installed, except for MDO3000 models, which require the MDO3USB. Note that 1 GHz bandwidth models are recommended for high-speed (HS) USB. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:OFFSet <NR1> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:OFFSet? Arguments <NR1>...
Page 735 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:TYPe This command speciﬁes the data type to be used in a USB search, when the search condition is set to is the search number, which DATAPacket. SEARCH<x> is always 1, and B<x> Conditions This command requires the DPO4USB application module to be installed, except for MDO3000 models, which require the MDO3USB.
Page 736 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:VALue <QString> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:VALue? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition Arguments within the range 00000000 to 11111111 (00 hex to FF hex). <QString> Examples sets SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:VALUE “00001000” the binary address to 00001000 (08 hex). might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:VALUE? :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:VALUE “01000000”...
Page 737 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ENDPOINT:VALUE? :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ENDPOINT:VALUE “1001” which indicates that the binary address is 1001 (09 hex). SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:ERRTYPE This command speciﬁes the error type to search for in a USB search, when the search condition is set to is the search number, which is ERRor SEARCH<x>...
Page 738 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires the DPO4USB application module to be installed, except for MDO3000 models, which require the MDO3USB. Note that 1 GHz bandwidth models are recommended for high-speed (HS) USB. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:HANDSHAKEType {ANY|NAK|ACK|STALL} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:HANDSHAKEType? Related Commands...
Page 739 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:QUALifier {LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual |MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:QUALifier? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition Arguments indicates the oscilloscope will search for a value that is less than a LESSthan set value. indicates the oscilloscope will search for a value that is greater than a MOREthan set value.
Page 740 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires the DPO4USB application module to be installed, except for MDO3000 models, which require the MDO3USB. Note that 1 GHz bandwidth models are recommended for high-speed (HS) USB. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:SOFFRAMENUMber <QString>...
Page 741 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments indicates the oscilloscope will search for any type of special packet. indicates the oscilloscope will search for a preamble special packet. PREamble indicates the oscilloscope will search for a reserved special packet. RESERVed Examples sets SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS1:USB:SPECIALTYPE PREAMBLE the special packet type to preamble.
Page 742 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPLit:ET:VALue? return BULK, indicating that the bulk endpoint type has been speciﬁed to search for. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:HUB:VALue When searching on a high-speed USB split transaction, this command speciﬁes the split transaction hub address value to search for. The value can be up to 7 characters long.
Page 743 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires the DPO4USB application module to be installed, except for MDO3000 models, which require the MDO3USB. Note that 1 GHz bandwidth models are recommended for high-speed (HS) USB. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:PORT:VALue <QString>...
Page 744 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments — search for either the start or complete phase of the split transaction. NOCARE — search for the start phase of the split transaction. SSPLIT — search for the complete phase of the split transaction. CSPLIT Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPLit:SC:VALue SSPLIT...
Page 745 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:SE:VALue {NOCARE|FULLSPeed|LOWSPeed|ISOSTART|ISOMID|ISOEND|ISOALL} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:SE:VALue? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPECIALType Arguments — any combination of S and E bits. NOCARE — S bit = 0, E bit = 0. FULLSPeed — S bit = 1, E bit = 0. LOWSPeed —...
Page 746 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments indicates any of the token types. indicates a SOF (start-of-frame) token type indicates an OUT token type. indicates an IN token type. indicates a SETUP token type. SETUP Examples sets the SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:TOKENTYPE SETUP token type to SETUP. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:TOKENTYPE? if the token...
Page 747 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes a rising edge. RISe speciﬁes a falling edge. FALL speciﬁes to trigger on either the rising or falling edge of a signal. EITHer SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce This command speciﬁes the source waveform to be used in an edge search . <x> is the search number.
Page 748 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the threshold level to a preset TTL high level of 1.4V. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:MATH This command sets the threshold level to use when searching on the math waveform. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:MATH {<NR3>|ECL|TTL} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:MATH? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that sets the threshold level to search for, in <NR3>...
Page 749 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions MDO4000/B and MDO4000C with option SA3 or SA6 only. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:RF_AMPlitude {<NR3>|ECL|TTL} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:RF_AMPlitude? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that sets the threshold level, in Volts, to use <NR3> when searching on the RF Amplitude vs. Time trace. sets the threshold level to a preset ECL high level of -1.3V.
Page 750 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:RF_PHASe {<NR1>|ECL|TTL} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:RF_PHASe? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that sets the threshold level, in Volts, to use <NR3> when searching on the RF Phase vs. Time trace. sets the threshold level to a preset ECL high level of -1.3V. sets the threshold level to a preset TTL high level of 1.4V.
Page 751 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the logic high. HIGH speciﬁes the logic low. speciﬁes a "don't care" state. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE This command speciﬁes the clock edge condition (rising or falling) to be used in a logic search. <x> is the search number, which is always 1. Group Search Syntax...
Page 752 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes no clock source. NONe speciﬁes a digital channel as the clock source. D0-D15 specify an RF time domain trace as RF_AMPlitude|RF_FREQuency|RF_PHASe the clock source. (MDO4000/B/C only.) SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:D<x> This command speciﬁes the logic condition to be used in a logic search when the input is a digital channel.
Page 753 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:REF<x> This command speciﬁes the logic condition of the reference waveform to be used in a logic search. is the search number, which is always 1, and SEARCH<x> is the reference channel number, which can be 1–4. REF<x>...
Page 754 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGic:INPut:RF_AMPlitude HIGH speciﬁes to set a mark when the waveform goes above the logic threshold speciﬁed by SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF_AMPlitude. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGic:INPut:RF_AMPlitude? return HIGH, indicating that the search engine has been set to set a mark when a waveform goes above the logic threshold speciﬁed by SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF_AMPlitude.
Page 755 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:RF_PHASe This command speciﬁes the logic criteria to search for when searching using the RF Phase vs. Time trace. This command is used together with SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF_PHASe to search for an instance when the waveform goes higher or lower than the speciﬁed threshold. “LOW”...
Page 756 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH<x> {HIGH|LOW|X} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH<x>? Arguments speciﬁes a high logic level. HIGH speciﬁes a low logic level. speciﬁes a “don't care” condition. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn This command speciﬁes the qualiﬁer to be used in a logic pattern search. <x> is the search number, which is always 1.
Page 757 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit This command speciﬁes the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern search to place a mark. <x> is the search number, which is always 1 Group Search Syntax...
Page 758 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the search level, in volts. <NR3> speciﬁes a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:MATH This command speciﬁes the math waveform threshold level for a logic search to determine where to place a mark.
Page 759 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF_AMPlitude {<NR3>} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF_AMPlitude? Related Commands TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF Examples 1.5 sets SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF_AMPlitude the search’s threshold to 1.5V. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF_AMPlitude? return 1.5, indicating that the search’s threshold is 1.5V. Following is an example command sequence showing how to generate a single search mark on the RF_AMPLitude waveform when the waveform is logic 0 (less than 1.5V): SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF_AMPlitude 1.5...
Page 760 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF_FREQuency sets the search’s threshold to 1 MHz. 1.00E+6 might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF_FREQuency? return 1.00E+6, indicating that the search’s threshold is 1 MHz. Following is an example command sequence showing how to generate a single search mark on the RF_FREQuency waveform when the waveform is logic 0 (less than 1 MHz): SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF_FREQuency...
Page 761 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF_PHASe? 4.500E+1, indicating that the search’s threshold is 45 degrees. Following is an example command sequence showing how to generate a single search mark on the RF_PHASe waveform when the waveform is logic 0 (less than 45 degrees): SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:RF_PHASe 4.500E+1 SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:RF_PHASe LOW...
Page 762 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:REF<x> This command speciﬁes the reference waveform lower threshold to determine where to place a mark. This setting is applied to all reference searches that use a lower threshold.
Page 763 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:RF_AMPlitude 0.1 the lower threshold to 0.1V. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:RF_AMPlitude? return 1.00E–1, indicating that the lower threshold has been set to 0.1V. Following is an example command sequence showing how to generate a single search mark on the RF_AMPLitude waveform when the waveform is logic 0 (less than 1.5V): SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:RF_AMPlitude 1.5...
Page 764 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:RF_FREQuency? return 100.0E+6, indicating that the lower threshold has been set to 100 MHz. Following is an example command sequence showing how to generate a single search mark on the RF_FREQuency waveform when the waveform is logic 0 (less than 1 MHz): SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:RF_FREQuency 1.00E+6 SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:RF_FREQuency LOW...
Page 765 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Following is an example command sequence showing how to generate a single search mark on the RF_PHASe waveform when the waveform is logic 0 (less than 45 degrees): SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:RF_PHASe 4.500E+1 SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:RF_PHASe LOW SEARCH:SEARCH1:STATE 1 SEARCH:SEARCH1:LIST? :SEARCH:SEARCH1:LIST RF_PHASe,2.4702,2.4702,2.4702,-19.0119E-6,0.0E+0,0.0E+0, 0.0E+0 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit...
Page 766 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (Use SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit to specify the upper limit of the range.) Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit, SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that represents the lower value of a range. <NR3> Examples To ﬁnd all pulses in the waveform record with durations (widths) that fall outside of the range of 100 nanoseconds to 110 nanoseconds:...
Page 767 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4|D0|D1|D2|D3|D4 |D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|RF_AMPlitude| RF_FREQuency|RF_PHASe} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce? Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the source waveform. CH1–4 speciﬁes the math waveform as the source waveform. MATH speciﬁes a reference waveform as the source waveform. REF1–4 speciﬁes a digital channel as the source waveform.
Page 768 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order searches for pulse widths unequal to the time set using UNEQual SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth within a tolerance of ±5%. searches for pulse widths less than the speciﬁed HIGHLimit WIThin and greater than the speciﬁed LOWLimit. The limits are speciﬁed using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit.
Page 769 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the pulse SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth 5.0E-6 width to search for to 5 µs in duration. might return SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth? SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WIDTH 2.0000E-9 indicating that the oscilloscope is set to search for pulses of 2 ns in duration. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity This command speciﬁes the polarity setting for a runt search to determine where to place a mark.
Page 770 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the runt search source. CH1–CH4 speciﬁes the math waveform as the runt search source. MATH speciﬁes a reference waveform as the runt search source. REF1–REF4 specify an RF time domain trace as RF_AMPlitude|RF_FREQuency|RF_PHASe the source.
Page 771 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the minimum width, in seconds. <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE This command speciﬁes the clock slope setting for a setup/hold search to determine where to place a mark. is the search number, which is SEARCH<x>...
Page 772 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes a digital channel as the clock source waveform. D0–D15 speciﬁes an RF time domain trace RF_AMPlitude|RF_FREQuency|RF_PHASe as the clock source waveform. (MDO4000/B/C only.) SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold This command speciﬁes the clock threshold setting for an setup/hold search to determine where to place a mark.
Page 773 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes a reference waveform as the data source. REF1–4 speciﬁes a digital input as the data source (MSO/MDO4000/B models D0–D15 only as well as MDO3000 and MDO400C models with option MDO3MSO or MDO4MSO installed.) specify an RF time domain trace as RF_AMPlitude|RF_FREQuency|RF_PHASe the data source.
Page 774 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime This command speciﬁes the setup time setting for an setup/hold search to determine where to place a mark. is the search number, which is SEARCH<x> always 1. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the setup time for setup and hold <NR3>...
Page 775 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:REF<x> <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:REF<x>? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the lower threshold in volts. <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity When searching using the search type, this commands speciﬁes the TIMEOut polarity to be used. Use the command SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe to specify the timeout search type.
Page 776 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order type is selected using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe. SEARCH<x> the search number, which is always 1. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4|D0|D1|D2|D3| D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15| RF_AMPlitude|RF_FREQuency|RF_PHASe} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce? Related Commands TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity Arguments speciﬁes to use one of the analog channels as the source waveform. CH1–4 speciﬁes to use the math waveform as the as the source waveform.
Page 777 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order selected using SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe. is the SEARCH<x> search number, which is always 1. Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce Arguments <NR3> is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the timeout time, in seconds. The default is 8.0000E-9.
Page 778 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity {EITher|NEGative|POSitive} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:POLarity? Arguments speciﬁes that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower (most POSitive negative) to higher (most positive) level for transition searching to occur. speciﬁes that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper (most positive) NEGative to lower (most negative) level for transition searching to occur.
Page 779 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn {SLOWer|FASTer|EQual|UNEQual} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:WHEn? Arguments sets the search to occur when the transitioning signal is faster than the set FASTer volts/second rate. sets the search to occur when the transitioning signal is slower than the SLOWer set volts/second rate.
Page 780 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order searches for when a pulse crosses the ﬁrst preset voltage threshold, but does RUNt not cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the ﬁrst. The thresholds are set using the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> commands. searches for when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same TRANsition direction as the speciﬁed polarity and the transition time between the two threshold crossings is greater or less than the speciﬁed time delta.
Page 781 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:REF<x> This command speciﬁes the reference waveform upper threshold to determine where to place a mark. This setting is applied to all reference waveform searches that use an upper threshold. is the search number, which is always 1, SEARCH<x>...
Page 782 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:RF_FREQuency For a runt or transition search using the RF Frequency vs. Time trace, this command speciﬁes the upper threshold to be used by the search engine. (To specify the lower threshold, use the command SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:RF_AMPlitude.) Conditions MDO4000/B/C models only.
Page 783 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:RF Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the threshold for the time domain <NR3> trace, in degrees. Examples sets the SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:RF_PHASe 15 upper threshold to 15 degrees. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:RF_PHASe? 15, indicating that the upper threshold has been set to 15 degrees. SEARCH:SPECTral:LIST? (Query Only) This query will return a list of all automatically placed peak markers displayed in the frequency domain graticule.
Page 784 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order End — end value in percent of record Focus — focus value in percent of record X value — horizontal value of the focus point in the mark’s waveform units Y value — vertical value of the focus point in the mark’s waveform units Delta X value —...
Page 785 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Vertical Syntax SELect:{BUS<x>|B<x>} {OFF|ON|0|1} SELect:{BUS<x>|B<x>}? Arguments or 1 turns the speciﬁed waveform display on. or 0 turns the speciﬁed waveform display off. SELect:CH<x> Turns the display of the channel <x> waveform on or off, where <x > is the channel number, which can be 1–4.
Page 786 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order |D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12|D13|D14|D15|RF_AMPlitude|RF_FREQuency |RF_PHASe|RF_NORMal|RF_AVErage| RF_MAXHold|RF_MINHold} SELect:CONTROl? Arguments speciﬁes a channel waveform as the waveform affected by the front-panel CH1–4 controls. speciﬁes the math waveform as the waveform that is affected by the MATH front-panel controls. speciﬁes a bus waveform as the waveform affected by the front-panel BUS1–4 controls.
Page 787 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands SELect:CONTROl:SELect:CONTROl:SELect:D<0-15> SELect:D<x> Arguments This command takes a Boolean argument, which means it can be used to either turn all digital channels on or all digital channels off. Examples turns on all digital channels. SELect:DAll 1 SELect:D<x>...
Page 788 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SELect{:MATH|:MATH1} {ON|OFF|<NR1>} SELect{:MATH|:MATH1}? Arguments turns on the display of the speciﬁed waveform. This waveform also becomes the selected waveform. turns off the display of the speciﬁed waveform. = 0 turns off the display of the speciﬁed waveform; any other value turns <NR1>...
Page 789 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SELect:RF_AMPlitude This command switches the RF Amplitude vs. Time trace display on or off in the time domain graticule. Conditions MDO4000/B/C models only. Group Syntax SELect:RF_AMPlitude {OFF|ON|0|1} SELect:RF_AMPlitude? Arguments turns the RF Amplitude vs. Time trace display off. turns it on.
Page 790 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SELect:RF_FREQuency {OFF|ON|0|1} SELect:RF_FREQuency? Arguments turns the RF Frequency vs. Time trace display off. turns it on. SELect:RF_MAXHold This command switches the frequency domain Max Hold trace display on or off in the frequency domain graticule. Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only.
Page 791 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SELect:RF_NORMal This command switches the frequency domain Normal trace display on or off in the frequency domain graticule. Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only. Group Syntax SELect:RF_NORMal {OFF|ON|0|1} SELect:RF_NORMal? Arguments turns the frequency domain Normal trace display off.
Page 792 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order as a command string. The VERBose command can still be used to specify whether the returned headers should be abbreviated or full-length. This command is identical to the *LRN? command. Group Miscellaneous Syntax SET? Related Commands HEADer|:HDR, *LRN?, VERBose Examples...
Page 793 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SETUP<x>:DATE? Examples might return which is the setup SETUP4:DATE? SETUP4:DATE: 04–18–06 date for channel 4. SETUP<x>:LABEL This command speciﬁes the setup label for the speciﬁed channel <x>, where x can be 1 through 10. Group Save and Recall Syntax...
Page 794 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order The default state is enabled. (See page 1-11, Setting Up Remote Communications Software.) NOTE. If the socket server state is 0 (disabled) and this command is sent to enable the socket server when the port is in use by another service, then the error event code 221 (settings conﬂict) is posted to the event queue, and the socket server remains disabled.
Page 795 . (See page 1-11, Setting Up Remote Communications Software.) NONe Terminal protocol supports the following commands and protocol: Tektronix Instrument Control Terminal Session Control commands: Tektronix Instrument Control Terminal Session Control commands: !t <timeout>: set the response timeout in milliseconds.
Page 796 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes that a session startup message be sent to the socket, and a TERMinal command prompt is provided. disables these features, allowing the server to be used for raw socket NONe transactions. Examples sets the protocol to terminal, so that a SOCKETServer:PROTOCol TERMinal session startup message is sent to the socket, and a command prompt is provided.
Page 797 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the bits in the SRER to binary 00110000. *SRE 48 ? might return 32, showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary value *SRE of 00100000. *STB? (Query Only) *STB? (Read Status Byte) returns the contents of the Status Byte Register (SBR) using the Master Summary Status (MSS) bit.
Page 798 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. The TEKSecure command can take up to ﬁve minutes to complete. The oscilloscope is inoperable during this period. Group Miscellaneous Syntax TEKSecure Examples initializes both waveform and setup memories. TEKSECURE This is a program example of how to generate an SRQ when TEKSECURE completes: # Bit 0 of the DESE (Device Event Status Enable Register)
Page 799 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a time in the form "hh:mm:ss" where hh refers to a two-digit hour <QString> number, mm refers to a two-digit minute number from 00 to 59, and ss refers to a two-digit second number from 00 to 59. Examples sets the time to exactly 2:00 p.m.
Page 800 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger FORCe TRIGger? Arguments creates a trigger event. If TRIGger:STATE is set to READy, the acquisition FORCe will complete. Otherwise, this command will be ignored. Examples forces a trigger event to occur. TRIGGER FORCE TRIGger:A Sets the A trigger level automatically to 50% of the range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal.
Page 801 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AND;THRESHOLD: CH1 20.0000E-3;CH2 0.0000;CH3 0.0000;CH4 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 X;CH2 X;CH3 X;CH4 X;CLOCK:SOURCE NONE;EDGE RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH1 X; CH2 X;CH3 X;CH4 X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT 4.0000E-9;MO RELIMIT 4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1;EDGE RISE;THRESHOLD 20.000 0E-3;:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH2;THRESHOLD 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLD TIME 4.0000E-9;SETTIME 4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS TRANSITION;:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE CH1;POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN LESSTHAN;WIDTH 4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE CH1;POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:SOURCE CH1;POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN SLOWER;DELTATIME 4.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO :POLARITY POSITIVE;SOURCE...
Page 802 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BANDWidth:RF:LOW? (Query Only) Returns the low end of the power level trigger bandwidth range as an NR3 value in hertz. This is the value that is displayed in the user interface when the trigger source is RF. This command requires the MDO4TRIG advanced trigger feature to be enabled.
Page 803 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions For I C or SPI bus signals, install the DPO4EMBD application module, except for MDO3000 models, which require MDO3EMBD. For RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, or UART bus signals, install the DPO4COMP module, except for MDO3000 models, which require MDO3COMP. For I S, Left Justiﬁed (LJ), Right Justiﬁed (RJ), or TDM bus signals, install the DPO4AUDIO module, except for MDO3000 models, which require...
Page 804 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes the FLexRay bus. FLEXRay speciﬁes the audio bus. AUDio speciﬁes the Ethernet bus. ETHERnet speciﬁes the MIL-STD-1553 bus. MIL1553B TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:CONDition This command sets the condition (word start, label, matching data, word end, or error) to be used to trigger on CAN bus data. B<x> is the bus number. Conditions This command requires installation of a DPO4AERO application module for MDO4000C models, or MDO3AERO for MDO3000 models.
Page 805 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples enables triggering on TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:CONDITION STARt the ﬁrst bit of a word. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ARINC429A:CONDITION? return ERROR, indicating a trigger on packet error condition. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA:HIVALue When the trigger condition is set to DATA or LABELANDDATA, and the qualiﬁer is set to either INrange or OUTrange, this command speciﬁes the upper value of the range for a trigger on the data ﬁeld.
Page 806 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA:HIVALue? "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX". TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA:QUALiﬁer This command speciﬁes the qualiﬁer to be used when triggering on the ARINC429 data ﬁeld(s). The trigger condition must be set to DATA or LABELANDDATA. The default qualiﬁer is “Equal to”. B<x> is the bus number. Conditions This command requires installation of a DPO4AERO application module for MDO4000C models, or MDO3AERO for MDO3000 models.
Page 807 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA:QUALifier LESSthan label qualiﬁer to less than. might return EQUAL TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA:QUALifier? indicating the label qualiﬁer is set to =. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:DATA:VALue This command speciﬁes the low value to be used when triggering on the ARINC429 bus data ﬁeld(s).
Page 808 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:ERRTYPE This command speciﬁes the error type when triggering on an ARINC429 bus signal. The trigger condition needs to be set to ERROR (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:CONDition). B<x> is the bus number. Conditions This command requires installation of a DPO4AERO application module for MDO4000C models, or MDO3AERO for MDO3000 models.
Page 809 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:HIVALue <QString> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:HIVALue? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:CONDition TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:QUALiﬁer TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:VALue Arguments QString is a quoted string of 8 bits. The allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged.
Page 810 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the label qualiﬁer to equal. EQual sets the label qualiﬁer to not equal. UNEQual sets the label qualiﬁer to less than or equal. LESSEQual sets the label qualiﬁer to greater than or equal. MOREEQual sets the label qualiﬁer to in range.
Page 811 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples "XXXX1000" sets the TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:VALue upper limit of the range to XXXX1000. might return TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:LABel:VALue? "XXXXXXXX". TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SDI This command speciﬁes the value for the SDI ﬁeld to be used when triggering on the ARINC429 bus data ﬁeld(s). The trigger condition must be set to DATA or LABELANDDATA (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:CONDition).
Page 812 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LABELANDDATA (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:CONDition). The default is all X's (don't care). B<x> is the bus number. Conditions This command requires installation of a DPO4AERO application module for MDO4000C models, or MDO3AERO for MDO3000 models. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ARINC429A:SSM <QString>...
Page 813 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition {SOF|DATA} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition? Arguments enables triggering on the start of frame. enables triggering on matching data. DATA TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:HIVALue This command sets the upper word value to be used when triggering on an audio bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to DATA using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition.
Page 814 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the data offset value. <NR1> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:QUALiﬁer This command sets the qualiﬁer (<, >, =, <=, >=, not =, in range, out of range) to be used when triggering on an audio bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to DATA using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:CONDition.
Page 815 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUDIO application module on DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models and a MDO3AUDIO application module on MDO3000 models. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:VALue <String> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:VALue? Arguments speciﬁes the trigger data lower word. <String> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:AUDio:DATa:WORD This command sets the alignment of the data (left, right or either) to be used to trigger on an audio bus signal.
Page 816 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4AUTOMAX application module on a DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models and a MDO3AUTO application module on MDO3000 models. , and are supported only on MDO3000 and FORMERRor ANYERRor FDBRS FDESI MDO4000C models and available only when :BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard is set to...
Page 817 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). is the bus number (1-4). 1-3 for B<x> the MDO4000C and 1-2 for the MDO3000. Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4AUTOMAX application module on DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models and a MDO3AUTO application module on MDO3000 models.
Page 818 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue Arguments is a number specifying the data offset. It can be set to -1 to 7 for CAN 2.0 <NR1> and -1 to 63 for CAN FD. These ranges are modiﬁed by the following: A value of -1 signiﬁes “don’t care”...
Page 819 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier {LESSthan|Than|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual|EQual} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier? Arguments sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is less than the qualiﬁer LESSthan value. sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is than the qualiﬁer value. Than sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is equal to the qualiﬁer value. EQual sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is not equal to the qualiﬁer UNEQual...
Page 820 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue This command sets the binary data value to be used when triggering on a CAN bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to IDANDDATA OR DATA (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). is the bus number (1-4). 1-3 for B<x>...
Page 821 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments , and specify that the BRS bit must have value 0. If queried, the ZERo command will always return 0 if set with these arguments. , and specify that the BRS bit must have value 1. If queried, the command will always return 1 if set with these arguments.
Page 822 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4AUTOMAX application module on DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models and a MDO3AUTO application module on MDO3000 models. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype {DATA|REMote|ERRor|OVERLoad} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype? Arguments speciﬁes a data frame type. DATA speciﬁes a remote frame type.
Page 823 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN{:IDentiﬁer|:ADDRess}:VALue This command sets the binary address value to be used when triggering on a CAN bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to IDANDDATA OR DATA (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). is the bus number (1-4). 1-3 for B<x>...
Page 824 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:PROTOcol TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:FRAMETYPe SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition Arguments — Start of frame delimiter. — MAC addresses ﬁeld. MACADDRess — MAC length/type ﬁeld. MACLENgth — IP header ﬁeld. This argument is only available when IPHeader PROTOCOL is set to IPv4 (using the command BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:PROTOcol). —...
Page 825 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue <QString> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:VALue TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QUALiﬁer Arguments QString is a quoted string whose length varies depending on the size setting, up to 32 bits. (Use the command TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe specify the size.) The allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged.
Page 826 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is an integer whose minimum and default values are -1 (don't care) and <NR1> maximum is 1,499. Examples sets the data offset to 36 TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet 36 bytes. might return –1, indicating TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:DATa:OFFSet? that the data offset value is the default value, –1, meaning “don’t care”. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:SIZe When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to , this command speciﬁes the...
Page 827 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order condition is set to , and the qualiﬁer is set to DATa INrange OUTrange, this command speciﬁes the lower limit of the range. (Use the command TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:DATa:HIVALue to set the upper limit of the range.) The default is all X’s (don’t care). is the bus number B1-B4.
Page 828 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. Once this command is used to specify QTAG, then the command TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition can be used to specify QTAG as the condition to trigger on. Conditions This command requires a DPO4ENET application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models.
Page 829 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:SOUrceaddr:VALue TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:IPHeader:PROTOcol:VALue BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:PROTOcol Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged.
Page 830 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 8 characters where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged. Examples “01010010”...
Page 831 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:DESTination:VALue When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to , this command MACADDress speciﬁes the 48–bit MAC destination address that is to be used in the trigger (along with the source address value). The default is all X’s (don’t care). B<x>...
Page 832 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4ENET application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce:VALue <QString> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:SOUrce:VALue? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC:ADDRess:DESTination:VALue Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 48 characters where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and X.
Page 833 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QUALiﬁer TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:MAC{:LENgth|:TYPe}:VALue Arguments QString is a quoted string of up toe 16 characters where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged.
Page 834 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 16 characters where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged. Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:MAC{:LENgth|:TYPe}:VALue sets the MAC length/type value to trigger on the...
Page 835 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:QUALiﬁer This command speciﬁes the qualiﬁer to be used when the Ethernet trigger condition is set to . Normally, the Ethernet qualiﬁer is set to MACLENgth DATa “Equal to”. is the bus number B1-B4. B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4ENET application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models.
Page 836 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue <QString> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:ACKnum:VALue? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:CONDition TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:VALue TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport:VALue TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 32 characters where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged.
Page 837 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:VALue would set the destination port address value that is to be “XXXXXXXX00100010” used in the trigger to hexadecimal XX22. TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:DESTinationport:VALue? might return “XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX”. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SEQnum:VALue When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to , this command speciﬁes TCPHeader the 32–bit sequence number that is to be used in the trigger (along with the destination and source port addresses and the acknowledgement value).
Page 838 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:ETHERnet:TCPHeader:SOUrceport:VALue When the Ethernet trigger condition is set to , this command speciﬁes TCPHeader the 16–bit source port address that is to be used in the trigger (along with the destination port address, the sequence number and the acknowledgement number). The default is all X’s (don’t care).
Page 839 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTOMAX application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3FLEX application module for MDO3000 models. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition {SOF|FRAMEType|IDentifier|CYCLEcount|HEADer|DATA |IDANDDATA|EOF|ERROR} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition? Arguments sets the trigger condition to start of frame. sets the trigger condition to frame type.
Page 840 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:HIVALue <QString> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:HIVALue? Arguments is a quoted string that is the cycle count high value. <QString> Examples sets the TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:HIVALUE “110010” cycle count high value to 110010. might return TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:HIVALUE? indicating TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:HIVALUE "XXXXXX" the cycle count high value is don't care. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:QUALiﬁer This command speciﬁes the qualiﬁer (<, >, =, <=, >=, not =, in range, out of range) to use when triggering on the FlexRay bus cycle...
Page 841 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN cycle count qualiﬁer to LESSTHAN. might return TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:QUALIFIER? indicating TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:CYCLECOUNT:QUALIFIER EQUAL that the cycle count qualiﬁer is set to EQUAL. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CYCLEcount:VALue This command speciﬁes the low value when triggering on the FlexRay bus cycle count ﬁeld.
Page 842 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTOMAX application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3FLEX application module for MDO3000 models. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:HIVALue <QString> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:HIVALue? Arguments is a quoted string that is the binary data high value. <QString>...
Page 843 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:OFFSET? indicating that a data offset TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:OFFSET 0 of 0. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:QUALiﬁer This command speciﬁes the qualiﬁer (<, >, =, <=, >=, not =, in range, out of range) to use when triggering on the FlexRay bus data ﬁeld. The trigger condition needs to be set to ID or IDANDDATA (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition).
Page 844 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:SIZe This command speciﬁes the length of the data string, in bytes, when triggering on the FlexRay bus data ﬁeld. The trigger condition needs to be set to ID or IDANDDATA (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). B<x> Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:DATa:SIZe <NR1>...
Page 845 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:VALUE? indicating the TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" FlexRay data value is don't care. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:EOFTYPE This command speciﬁes the end of ﬁle type (static, dynamic or any) when triggering on the FlexRay bus EOF ﬁeld. The trigger condition needs to be set to EOF (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition).
Page 846 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:ERRTYPE {CRCHeader|CRCTrailer|SYNCFrame|STARTupnosync|NULLFRStatic| NULLFRDynamic} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:ERRTYPE? Arguments sets the error type to CRCHeader. CRCHeader sets the error type to CRCTrailer. CRCTrailer sets the error type to SYNCFrame. SYNCFrame sets the error type to STARTupnosync. STARTupnosync sets the error type to NULLFRStatic.
Page 847 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALUE “11001100101” frame ID high value to 11001100101. might return TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALUE? TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMEID:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX" indicating the frame ID high value is “don't care”. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:QUALiﬁer This command speciﬁes the qualiﬁer to use when triggering on the FlexRay bus frame ID ﬁeld.
Page 848 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:VALue This command speciﬁes the low value when triggering on the FlexRay bus frame ID ﬁeld. (Use TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:FRAMEID:HIVALue set the high value.) The trigger condition needs to be set to IDentiﬁer (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTOMAX application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3FLEX application module for MDO3000 models.
Page 849 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the normal frame type. NORMal speciﬁes the payload frame type. PAYLoad speciﬁes the null frame type. NULL speciﬁes the sync frame type. SYNC speciﬁes the startup frame type. STARTup Examples sets the frame type to TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:FRAMETYPE PAYLOAD payload.
Page 850 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:CYCLEcount This command speciﬁes the cycle count portion of the binary header string when triggering on the FlexRay bus header. The trigger condition needs to be set to HEADer (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:CONDition). B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTOMAX application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3FLEX application module for MDO3000 models.
Page 851 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a quoted string that represents the frame ID portion of the binary <QString> header string. Examples sets the TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID “11001100101” frame ID portion of the binary header string to 11001100101. might return TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID? TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:FLEXRAY:HEADER:FRAMEID "XXXXXXXXXXX"...
Page 852 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTOMAX application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3FLEX application module for MDO3000 models. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:PAYLength <QString> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:FLEXray:HEADER:PAYLength? Arguments is the length of the payload portion of the Binary header string. <QString>...
Page 853 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe This command speciﬁes the I C address type. The only supported address type is USER. Applies to bus <x>, where x Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3EMBD application module for MDO3000 models.
Page 854 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the I C address value TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE 1011 to XXX1011. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition This command speciﬁes the trigger condition for an I C trigger. B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3EMBD application module for MDO3000 models.
Page 855 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection {READ|WRITE|NOCARE} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection? Arguments speciﬁes read as the data direction. READ speciﬁes write as the data direction. WRITE speciﬁes either as the data direction. NOCARE Examples speciﬁes write as the TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION WRITE C data direction.
Page 856 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue <QString> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue? Arguments is the binary data string, where the number of bits is 8 times the <QString> number of bytes speciﬁed. The only allowed characters in the string are 0, 1, and X.
Page 857 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue This command speciﬁes the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA. B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3AUTO application module for MDO3000 models.
Page 858 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the LIN data qualiﬁer to less than. LESSthan sets the LIN data qualiﬁer to greater than. MOREthan sets the LIN data qualiﬁer to equal. EQual sets the LIN data qualiﬁer to not equal. UNEQual sets the LIN data qualiﬁer to less than or equal.
Page 859 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue This command speciﬁes the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger condition if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA. Conditions This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3AUTO application module for MDO3000 models.
Page 860 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the LIN error type to header time. HEADertime sets the LIN error type to response time. RESPtime sets the LIN error type to frame time. FRAMetime Examples sets the LIN error type to TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE CHECKSUM checksum.
Page 861 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:VALue to specify the lower limit of the range.) The default is all X’s (don’t care). B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4AERO application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3AERO application module for MDO3000 models.
Page 862 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:QUALifier {LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual| INrange|OUTrange} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:QUALifier? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:VALue TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:HIVALue Arguments sets the Command Address qualiﬁer to less than. LESSthan sets the Command Address qualiﬁer to greater than. MOREthan sets the Command Address qualiﬁer to equal. EQual sets the Command Address qualiﬁer to not equal.
Page 863 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:VALue <QString> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:VALue? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:HIVALue TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:ADDRess:QUALiﬁer Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 5 characters, where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged.
Page 864 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:TRBit Arguments is a quoted string of up to 5 characters, where the allowable characters QString are 0, 1 and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged. Examples sets the bit TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:COUNt “01000”...
Page 865 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the Command TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARity ZERo word parity bit to 0. might return 0, 1 or X. TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:COMMAND:PARity? TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:COMMAND:SUBADdress When the MIL-STD-1553 bus trigger condition is set to , this command COMMAND speciﬁes the 5 bit sub-address that is to be used in the trigger. When the sub-address value is set to 00000 or 11111 binary, it speciﬁes that the command is a “Mode Code”...
Page 866 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order transmit/receive bit deﬁnes the direction of information ﬂow, and is always from the point of view of the remote terminal. B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4AERO application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3AERO application module for MDO3000 models.
Page 867 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition {SYNC|COMMAND|STATus|DATA|TIMe|ERRor} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition? Related Commands Most of the other commands are impacted TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B by the setting of this command. BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:POLarity BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:SOUrce Arguments refers to the 3–bit sync pulse that precedes each word. SYNC is one of 3 16–bit word types.
Page 868 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. Use the TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition:STATus:BIT commands to set the following bits: 9 — message error TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:ME 10 — instrumentation TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:INSTR 11 — SRQ (service request) TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SRQ 15 — BCR (broadcast command received) TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BCR 16 — busy TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BUSY 17 —...
Page 869 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa:PARity {0|1|X|ZERo|ONE|NOCARE|OFF|ON} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa:PARity? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa:VALue Arguments sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. sets the value to 0. ZERO sets the value to 1. sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. NOCARE sets the value to 0.
Page 870 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:DATa:PARity Arguments QString is a quoted string of up to 16 characters, where the allowable characters are 0, 1, and X. The bits speciﬁed in the quoted string replace the least signiﬁcant bits, leaving any unspeciﬁed upper bits unchanged.
Page 871 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the error type to be TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:ERRTYPE PARity used in the trigger to PARITY. might return SYNC. TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:ERRTYPE? TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:HIVALue When the MIL-STD-1553 bus trigger condition is set to , and the qualiﬁer STATus is set to , this command speciﬁes the upper limit for INrange OUTrange...
Page 872 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AERO application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3AERO application module for MDO3000 models. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:QUALifier {LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual| INrange|OUTrange} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:QUALifier? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:QUALiﬁer TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:HIVALue TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:VALue Arguments sets the Status Address qualiﬁer to less than. LESSthan sets the Status Address qualiﬁer to greater than.
Page 873 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order condition is set to , and the qualiﬁer is set to STATus INrange OUTrange, this command speciﬁes the lower limit of the range. (Use the command TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:ADDRess:HIVALue to specify the upper limit of the range.) The default is all X’s (don’t care). B<x>...
Page 874 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AERO application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3AERO application module for MDO3000 models. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BCR {0|1|X|ZERo|ONE|NOCARE|OFF|ON} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BCR? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition Arguments sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. sets the value to 0.
Page 875 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BUSY {0|1|X|ZERo|ONE|NOCARE|OFF|ON} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:BUSY? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition Arguments sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. sets the value to 0. ZERO sets the value to 1. sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. NOCARE sets the value to 0.
Page 876 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition Arguments sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. sets the value to 0. ZERO sets the value to 1. sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. NOCARE sets the value to 0.
Page 877 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. sets the value to 0. ZERO sets the value to 1. sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. NOCARE sets the value to 0. sets the value to 1.
Page 878 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the value to 0. sets the value to 1. Examples sets the status TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:ME NOCARE word message error bit value to be used in the trigger to X. might return 1. TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:ME? TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SRQ When the MIL-STD-1553 bus trigger condition is set to , this command STATus speciﬁes the status word service request (SRQ) bit value (bit 11) to be used in the...
Page 879 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return 1. TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:STATUS:BIT:SRQ? TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:SUBSF When the MIL-STD-1553 bus trigger condition is set to , this command STATus speciﬁes the status word subsystem ﬂag bit value (bit 17) to be used in the trigger. Returned values are 0, 1, or X (don’t care, which is the default). B<x>...
Page 880 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:BIT:TF When the MIL-STD-1553 bus trigger condition is set to , this command STATus speciﬁes the status word terminal ﬂag bit value (bit 19) to be used in the trigger. Returned values are 0, 1, or X (don’t care, which is the default). B<x>...
Page 881 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4AERO application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3AERO application module for MDO3000 models. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:PARity {0|1|X|ZERo|ONE|NOCARE|OFF|ON} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:STATus:PARity? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition Arguments sets the value to X (“don’t care”) which is the default. sets the value to 0.
Page 882 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:LESSLimit <NR3> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:LESSLimit? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:CONDition TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:MIL1553B:TIMe:MORELimit Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes either the minimum remote <NR3> terminal response time (RT) or the inter-message gap (IMG) in seconds. Examples would set TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:TIMe:LESSLimit 3.0000e-6 either the remote terminal response time (RT) or the inter-message gap (IMG) to...
Page 883 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes either the maximum remote <NR3> terminal response time (RT) or the inter-message gap (IMG) in seconds. Examples would set TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:TIMe:MORELimit 80.0000e-6 either the remote terminal response time (RT) or the inter-message gap (IMG) to be used in the trigger to 80.0 μS.
Page 884 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:MIL1553B:TIMe:QUALifier? OUTRANGE. TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:VALue This command speciﬁes the binary data string to be used for a Parallel trigger. Applies to bus <x>, where x Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:VALue <QString> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:VALue? Arguments is the binary data string. <QString>...
Page 885 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:RX:DATa:SIZe This command speciﬁes the length of the data string in Bytes for an RS-232 Trigger if the trigger condition is RXDATA. B<x> Conditions This command requires a DPO4COMP application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3COMP application module for MDO3000 models.
Page 886 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4COMP application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3COMP application module for MDO3000 models. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:SIZe <NR1> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:TX:DATa:SIZe? Arguments is the length of the data string in Bytes. <NR1>...
Page 887 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition {SS|STARTofframe|MISO|MOSI|MISOMOSI} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition? Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime, BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING Arguments speciﬁes the Slave Selection condition. is applicable when is set to STARTofframe BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING . When the trigger condition is set to , the instrument IDLEtime STARTofframe triggers on the ﬁrst SPI clock after an idle time when there are no clocks.
Page 888 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module for DPO/MSO4000B and MDO4000/B/C models or MDO3EMBD application module for MDO3000 models. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:MOSI}:VALue <QString> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa{:OUT|:MOSI}:VALue? Arguments is the binary data string with the number of bits speciﬁed by the <QString>...
Page 889 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:HIVALue <QString> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:HIVALue? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition, TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:ADDRess:VALue Arguments within the range 0000000 to 1111111 (00 hex to 7F hex). <QString> Examples sets the upper limit TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:HIVALUE “0001000” to binary 0001000 (08 hex). might return TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:HIVALUE? , which indicates...
Page 890 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE? , which :TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:ADDRESS:VALUE “1000000” indicates that the binary address is 100000 (40 hex). TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition This command speciﬁes the trigger condition for the USB trigger. B<x> Conditions This command requires the DPO4USB application module to be installed, except for MDO3000 models, which require the MDO3USB.
Page 891 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:HIVALue This command speciﬁes the binary data string for the upper limit for inside-of-range and outside-of-range qualiﬁers for the USB trigger when the trigger condition is DATAPacket. Use the command TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:VALue to set the lower limit. B<x>...
Page 892 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:OFFSet <NR1> TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:OFFSet? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition Arguments <NR1> is number in the range 0 to 1024. Examples sets the data offset to 36. TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:OFFSET 36 might return TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:OFFSET? , indicating that the :TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:OFFSET 0 data offset is the default value, 0.
Page 893 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires the DPO4USB application module to be installed, except for MDO3000 models, which require the MDO3USB. Note that 1 GHz bandwidth models are recommended for high-speed (HS) USB. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:TYPe {ANY|DATA0|DATA1} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:DATa:TYPe? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition...
Page 894 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition Arguments within the range 00000000 to 11111111 (00 hex to FF hex). <QString> Examples sets the binary address TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:VALUE “00001000” to 00001000 (08 hex). might return TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:VALUE? , which :TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:DATA:VALUE “01000000” indicates that the binary address is 0100000 (40 hex). TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:ENDPoint:VALue This command speciﬁes the binary endpoint string to be used for the USB trigger.
Page 895 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires the DPO4USB application module to be installed, except for MDO3000 models, which require the MDO3USB. Note that 1 GHz bandwidth models are recommended for high-speed (HS) USB. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:ERRTYPE {PID|CRC5|CRC16|BITSTUFFing} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:ERRTYPE? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition...
Page 896 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments indicates the oscilloscope will trigger on any handshake type. indicates the oscilloscope will trigger when a device cannot send or receive data. indicates the oscilloscope will trigger when a packet is successfully received. indicates the oscilloscope will trigger when a device requires intervention STALL from the host.
Page 897 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order triggers on an input value that is within a range set by two values. INrange triggers on an input value that is outside of a range set by two values. OUTrange Examples sets the oscilloscope to TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN trigger when an address, data, or endpoint value is less than a set value.
Page 898 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command requires the DPO4USB application module to be installed, except for MDO3000 models, which require the MDO3USB. Note that 1 GHz bandwidth models are recommended for high-speed (HS) USB. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPECIALType {ANY|PREamble|RESERVed} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPECIALType? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:CONDition...
Page 899 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments — any endpoint type. NOCARE — control endpoint type. CONTRol — isochronous endpoint type. ISOchronous — bulk endpoint type (BULK-IN or BULK-OUT). BULK — interrupt endpoint type (Interrupt-IN). INTERRUPT Examples sets the endpoint type to TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:USB:SPLit:ET:VALue iso trigger on to isochronous.
Page 900 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:PORT:VALue When triggering on a high-speed USB split transaction, this command speciﬁes the split transaction port address value to trigger on. The value can be up to 7 characters long. The default is all X’s (don’t care). B<x>...
Page 901 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPECIALType Arguments — trigger on either the start or complete phase of the split transaction. NOCARE — trigger on the start phase of the split transaction. SSPLIT — trigger on the complete phase of the split transaction. CSPLIT Examples speciﬁes to trigger on...
Page 902 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:SE:VALue {NOCARE|FULLSPeed|LOWSPeed|ISOSTART|ISOMID|ISOEND|ISOALL} TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPLit:SE:VALue? Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:USB:SPECIALType Arguments — any combination of S and E bits. NOCARE — S bit = 0, E bit = 0. FULLSPeed — S bit = 1, E bit = 0. LOWSPeed —...
Page 903 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments indicates any of the token types. indicates a SOF (start-of-frame) token type indicates an OUT token type. indicates an IN token type. indicates a SETUP token type. SETUP Examples sets the token type to SETUP. TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:TOKENTYPE SETUP might return TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:USB:TOKENTYPE?
Page 904 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce {B1|B2|B3|B4} TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce? Arguments speciﬁes the Bus 1 source. speciﬁes the Bus 2 source. speciﬁes the Bus 3 source. speciﬁes the Bus 4 source. TRIGger:A:EDGE? (Query Only) Returns the trigger source, coupling, and slope for the A edge trigger. Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 905 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes AC trigger coupling, speciﬁes DC trigger coupling, which passes all input signals to the trigger circuitry. speciﬁes high-frequency rejection coupling, which attenuates signals HFRej above 50 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry. speciﬁes low-frequency rejection coupling, which attenuates signals below LFRej 50 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry.
Page 906 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE? :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE FALL indicating that the A edge trigger slope is negative. TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce This command speciﬁes the source for the A edge trigger. NOTE. A series of example command sequences showing different searches and triggers is included as an appendix.
Page 907 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:HOLDoff? (Query Only) Returns the A trigger holdoff parameters. These parameters specify the time period during which the trigger circuitry is not looking to generate a trigger event. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:HOLDoff? Related Commands TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe Examples might return TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF?
Page 908 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command is not available for MDO4000/B series models, or 4-channel MDO3000 series models as they have no Aux Input connector. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:LEVel:AUXin {<NR3>|ECL|TTL} TRIGger:A:LEVel:AUXin? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that sets the trigger threshold level, in Volts, <NR3>...
Page 909 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. MDO3000 models only have two digital threshold controls: one for digital channels D0 - D7, and the other for D8 - D15. Digital channel trigger levels cannot be set independently for these models. Changing one digital channel’s threshold level changes all of the channels’...
Page 910 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss This command speciﬁes what kind of logic trigger to use (either logic or setup/hold). You also need to set the trigger type to using the command LOGIC TRIGger:A:TYPe. argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on logical combinations LOGIC of the channels (set using the commands as...
Page 911 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order THReshold, TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa: THReshold, TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime, TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime, TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:CH<x>, and TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold: D<x>. Examples might return TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS? :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS LOGIC sets the trigger A logic class to , which TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS LOGIC LOGIc causes the oscilloscope to trigger when the speciﬁed logical combinations of channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are met.
Page 912 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut? Examples might return TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT? :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 indicating that a logic high is expected on channel 1 while HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X channel 2 and channel three are “don't care.” TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> This command speciﬁes the logical input condition for the channel speciﬁed by <x>.
Page 913 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal. RISe speciﬁes to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal. FALL TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce This command speciﬁes the channel to use as the clock source. The clock can be selected as .
Page 914 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:RF This command speciﬁes the logic level to use when the internal RF power level is the source for a logic pattern trigger. Conditions MDO4000/B and MDO4000C with option SA3 or SA6 only. Also requires installation of an MDO4TRIG application module.
Page 915 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LESSTHAN;WHEN:LESSLIMIT 16.0000E-9;LIMIT 16.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:DELTATIME 16.0000E-9 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:DELTatime This command speciﬁes the pattern trigger delta time value. The time value is used as part of the pattern trigger condition to determine if the duration of a logic pattern meets the speciﬁed time constraints. Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 916 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true MORETHAN for a time period more (greater) than the time period speciﬁed in TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:DELTATIME triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true for a time period EQUAL equal to the time period speciﬁed in TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:DELTATIME...
Page 917 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. MDO3000 models only have two digital threshold controls: one for digital channels D0 - D7, and the other for D8 - D15. Digital channel trigger levels cannot be set independently for these models. Changing one digital channel’s threshold level changes all of the channels’...
Page 918 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold{:AUX|:EXT} This command speciﬁes the lower threshold for the Aux Input connector.Used for the following trigger types: runt, transition. Conditions This command is not available for MDO4000/B series models, or the 4-channel MDO3000 series models as they have no Aux Input connector. However, the 2-channel MDO3000 models do have an auxin, so this command is available.
Page 919 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:D<x> Sets the lower threshold for the digital channel selected. Each channel can have an independent level. Used in runt and transition as the lower threshold. Used for all other trigger types as the single level/threshold. NOTE.
Page 920 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:RF {<NR3>} TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:RF? Related Commands TRIGger:A:TYPe, TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling, TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe, TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:RF Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the threshold to use, in the <NR3> currently selected RF units (using RF:UNIts). The range is (ref level – 40 dBm) to (ref level + 10 dBm), but never less than –65 dBm or more than +30 dBm.
Page 921 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order To set the trigger source for a pulse trigger, use TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce, TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}: SOUrce, or TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce. To set the trigger voltage threshold level for a pulse trigger, use TRIGger:A: LEVel:AUXin, TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>, or TRIGger:A:LEVel:D<x>. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss {RUNt|WIDth|TRANsition|TIMEOut} TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss?
Page 922 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit This command speciﬁes the upper limit to use, in seconds, when triggering on detection of a pulse whose duration is inside or outside a range of two values. (Use TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit to specify the lower value of the range.) Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 923 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit 100.0E-9 TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit 110.0E-9 TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn OUTside TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity This command speciﬁes the polarity for a pulse width trigger. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity {NEGative|POSitive} TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity? Arguments speciﬁes a negative pulse. NEGative speciﬁes a positive pulse. POSitive Examples sets the pulse polarity to TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:POLARITY NEGATIVE negative.
Page 924 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes AC line voltage as the trigger source. LINE speciﬁes a digital channel as the trigger source. D0-D15 speciﬁes the internal RF power level as the trigger source. (MDO4000/B models and MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 installed only. Also requires installation of an MDO4TRIG application module.) Examples sets channel 1 as the pulse width source.
Page 925 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order causes a trigger when a pulse is detected that is within a range set by WIThin two values. causes a trigger when a pulse is detected that is outside of a range set OUTside by two values. Examples causes the TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WHEN LESSTHAN 2.0000E-9...
Page 926 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:RUNT? (Query Only) Returns the current A runt trigger parameters. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:RUNT? Examples might return TRIGGER:A:RUNT? :TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE CH1;POLARITY POSITIVE;WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 4.0000E-9 TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity This command speciﬁes the polarity for the runt trigger. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity {EITher|NEGative|POSitive} TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity?
Page 927 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|RF} TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce? Arguments speciﬁes the analog channel number to use as the source CH1–CH4 waveform for the runt trigger. To specify the threshold levels when using CH1–CH4 as the source, use TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>. speciﬁes the internal RF power level as the source (MDO4000/B/C models only, and requires installation of an MDO4TRIG application module.) To specify the threshold levels when using RF power level as the source, use...
Page 928 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the runt trigger to occur when the TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN MORETHAN oscilloscope detects a runt in a pulse wider than the speciﬁed width. might return TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN? :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN indicating that a runt trigger will occur if the oscilloscope detects a runt OCCURS of any detectable width.
Page 929 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD? :TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1;EDGE RISE;THRESHOLD 100.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH2;THRESHOLD 80.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 20.0000E-9;SETTIME 8.0000E-9 TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk? (Query Only) Returns the clock edge polarity, voltage threshold, and source input for setup and hold triggering. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk? Examples might return TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK? :TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE EXT;EDGE FALL;THRESHOLD...
Page 930 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce This command speciﬁes the clock source for the setup and hold triggering. You cannot specify the same source for both clock and data. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|D0|D1|D2|D3|D4|D5|D6|D7|D8|D9|D10|D11|D12 |D13|D14|D15|AUX} TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce? Related Commands TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce Arguments speciﬁes the analog channel to use as the clock source waveform.
Page 931 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the clock level, in volts. <NR3> speciﬁes a preset high level of 1.4 V. Examples speciﬁes the preset TTL value TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD TTL of 1.4 V as the clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger. might return TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD? :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 1.2000E+00...
Page 932 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce? Related Commands TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce Arguments speciﬁes an analog input channel as the data source for the setup and CH1–CH4 hold trigger. speciﬁes a digital channel as the source. (MSO/MDO4000/B models D0–D15 only as well as MDO3000 and MDO400C models with option MDO3MSO or MDO4MSO installed.) speciﬁes an external trigger using the Aux In connector located on the front panel of the oscilloscope.
Page 933 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD? indicating :TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.2000E+00 that 1.2 V is the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger. TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime This command speciﬁes the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>...
Page 934 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME? indicating that the :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME 2.0000E-09 current setup time for setup and hold trigger is 2 ns. TRIGger:A:SETHold:THReshold:CH<x> This command speciﬁes the threshold for the analog channel <x>. x can be 1–4. All trigger types using the channel are affected. Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 935 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the threshold voltage, in volts. <NR3> speciﬁes a preset ECL high level of –1.3V. speciﬁes a preset TTL high level of 1.4V. Examples sets the threshold to ECL levels. TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D1 ECL might return TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D1?
Page 936 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce When triggering using the trigger type, this command speciﬁes the TIMEOut source. The available sources are live channels, the digital channels, the Aux Input connector (MSO/DPO 4000B series models, MDO4000C series models without an RF option, and 2-channel MDO3000 models), or RF power level (MDO4000/B/C only).
Page 937 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe When triggering using the trigger type, this command speciﬁes the TIMEOut timeout time, in seconds. The default and minimum is 4.0E-9 seconds and the maximum is 8.0 seconds. The resolution is 800.0E-12 which means that the increments of time speciﬁed is 800 picoseconds.
Page 938 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime This command speciﬁes the delta time used in calculating the transition value for the transition trigger. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime <NR3> TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:DELTatime? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the delta time, in seconds. <NR3>...
Page 939 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY? :TRIGGER:A: indicating that the polarity can be either TRANSITION:POLARITY EITHER positive or negative. TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce This command speciﬁes the source for a transition trigger. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4} TRIGger:A{:TRANsition|:RISEFall}:SOUrce? Arguments speciﬁes one of the analog channels to be used as the source for a CH1–CH4 transition trigger.
Page 940 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is not equal to UNEQual the time set by TRIGger:A:TRANsition:DELTatime Examples sets the trigger to occur TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:WHEN SLOWER when the signal transition time is slower than the time set by the command.
Page 941 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss to further select the logic trigger class (either LOGIC SETHOLD speciﬁes that a trigger occurs when a speciﬁed pulse is found. Use PULSe TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss to further select the pulse trigger class (either runt, width, transition or timeout). speciﬁes that a trigger occurs when a bus signal is found.
Page 942 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:RF This command speciﬁes the upper threshold when the internal RF power level is used during runt triggering. To specify the lower threshold for the RUNT trigger type as well as the single threshold for the Pulse and Timeout trigger types, use the command TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:RF.
Page 943 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return TRIGGER:A:VIDEO? :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:STANDARD BILEVELCUSTOM;SYNC ALLLINES;LINE 4;HOLDOFF:FIELD 0.0E+0;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:POLARITY POSITIVE;CUSTOM:FORMAT PROGRESSIVE;LINEPERIOD 63.5600E-6;SYNCINTERVAL 4.7200E-6 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom{:FORMat|:TYPe} This command sets the video trigger format (either interlaced or progressive) to use for triggering on video signals. To use this command, you must also set the video standard to (using BILevelcustom...
Page 944 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:LINEPeriod <NR3> TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:LINEPeriod? Arguments is the custom video line period. <NR3> Examples sets the video line period TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:LINEPERIOD 50.5E-6 to 50.5 μs. might return TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:LINEPERIOD? indicating TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:LINEPERIOD 63.5600E-6 the video line period is set to 63.56 μs. TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SYNCInterval This command sets the sync interval for the standard under test to use for triggering on video signals.
Page 945 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLDoff:FIELD This command sets the video trigger holdoff, in terms of video ﬁelds, to use for triggering on video signals. Conditions This command requires a DPO4VID application module to use any standard besides NTSc, PAL, or SECAM, except for MDO3000 models, which do not require an application module.
Page 946 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments argument is an integer that sets the video line number on which the <NR1> oscilloscope triggers. The following table lists the valid choices, depending on the active video standard. Video Standard Line Number Range 525/NTSC 1–525 625/PAL...
Page 947 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a positive video sync pulse. POSitive argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a negative video sync NEGative pulse. Examples sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:POLARITY NEGATIVE negative video pulse.
Page 948: Table 2-57: Available Hdtv Formats
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard {NTSc|PAL|SECAM|BILevelcustom| TRILevelcustom| HD480P60|HD576P50|HD720P30|HD720P50 |HD720P60|HD875I60|HD1080P24|HD1080SF24|HD1080I50 |HD1080I60|HD1080P25|HD1080P30|HD1080P50|HD1080P60} TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard? Related Commands TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom{:FORMat|:TYPe}, TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom: LINEPeriod, TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SYNCInterval Arguments sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video signals that meet the NTSC NTSc 525/60/2:1 standard (a line rate of 525 lines per frame and a ﬁeld rate of 60 Hz). sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video signals that meet the NTSC 625/50/2:1 standard (a line rate of 625 lines per frame and a ﬁeld rate of 50 Hz).
Page 949 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2-57: Available HDTV formats (cont.) HDTV format Description 720p50 750 lines (720 active), 1280 x 720 pixel, progressive, 50 fps 720p60 750 lines (720 active), 1280 x 720 pixel, progressive, 60 fps 875i60 875 active lines, interlaced, 60 fps 1080i50 1125 Lines (1080 active), 1920 x 1080 pixel, interlaced, 50 fps...
Page 950 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD} {ODD|EVEN|ALLFields|ALLLines|NUMERic} TRIGger:A:VIDeo{:SYNC|:FIELD}? Arguments argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on interlaced video odd ﬁelds. argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on interlaced video even ﬁelds. EVEN argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on all ﬁelds. ALLFields argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on all video lines.
Page 951 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:B:BY Selects or returns whether the B trigger occurs after a speciﬁed number of events or a speciﬁed period of time after the A trigger. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:B:BY {EVENTS|TIMe} TRIGger:B:BY? Related Commands TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt, TRIGger:B:TIMe, , Arguments sets the B trigger to take place following a set number of trigger EVENTS...
Page 952 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling This command speciﬁes the type of coupling for the B edge trigger. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling {DC|HFRej|LFRej|NOISErej} TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling? Related Commands TRIGger:B:EDGE? Arguments selects trigger coupling. selects high-frequency reject coupling. HFRej selects low-frequency reject coupling. LFRej selects low sensitivity.
Page 953 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SLOPE? :TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SLOPE RISE indicating that the B edge trigger occurs on the rising slope. TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce This command speciﬁes the source for the B trigger. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|AUX|LINE|RF} TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce? Related Commands TRIGger:B:EDGE? Arguments speciﬁes an analog channel as the B trigger source.
Page 954 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return TRIGGER:B:EVENTS? :TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT 2 indicating that 2 events must occur before the B trigger occurs. TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt This command speciﬁes the number of events that must occur before the B trigger (when TRIG:DELay:BY is set to EVENTS). Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 955 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the B trigger level to 1.4 V. TRIGGER:B:LEVEL TTL might return TRIGGER:B:LEVEL? :TRIGGER:B:LEVEL 173.0000E-03 indicating that the B trigger level is currently set at 173 mV. TRIGger:B:LEVel:CH<x> This command speciﬁes the B trigger level for channel <x>, where x is the channel number.
Page 956 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes a preset ECL high level of –1.3V. speciﬁes a preset TTL high level of 1.4V. is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the trigger level in user units <NR3> (usually volts). TRIGger:B:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> This command speciﬁes the B trigger lower threshold for the channel <x>, where x is the channel number.
Page 957 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the threshold in volts. <NR3> speciﬁes a preset ECL high level of -1.3V. speciﬁes a preset TTL high level of 1.4V. Examples might return TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D1? indicating the threshold is set to TRIGGER:B:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D1 1.4000 1.4 volts.
Page 958 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:B:TIMe <NR3> TRIGger:B:TIMe? Related Commands TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt TRIGger:B:BY, Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the B trigger delay time in seconds. <NR3> Examples sets the B trigger delay time to 4 µs. TRIGGER:B:TIME 4E-6 might return indicating TRIGGER:B:TIME?
Page 959 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:EXTernal? TRIGger:EXTernal:PRObe This command speciﬁes the attenuation factor value of the probe attached to the Aux Input connector. Conditions For MSO/DPO 4000B series models, MDO4000C series models without an RF option, and 2-channel MDO3000 models only. Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 960 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:FREQuency? (Query Only) Returns the trigger frequency in hertz if available. If the trigger frequency is not currently available, the IEEE Not A Number (NaN = 99.10E+36) value is returned. The maximum precision of the returned frequency is 12 digits. Use the DISplay:TRIGFrequency command to enable/disable the calculation of...
Page 961 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return indicating that the TRIGGER:STATE? :TRIGGER:STATE ARMED pretrigger data is being acquired. *TST? (Query Only) Tests (self-test) the interface and returns a 0. Group Miscellaneous Syntax *TST? Examples always returns 0. *TST? UNLock (No Query Form) Unlocks the front panel.
Page 962 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments disables the rear USB port. DISabled enables the rear USB port as an SIC device. IMAge enables the rear USB port as a USBTMC device. USBTmc Examples enables the rear USB port as an SIC device USBDEVICE:CONFIGURE IMAGE might return USBDEVICE:CONFIGURE ?
Page 963 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order USBTMC:PRODUCTID:HEXadecimal? (Query Only) This query returns the product ID number as a hexadecimal value. The product ID numbers vary for each instrument family and model. USBTMC stands for USB Test & Measurement Class, a protocol that allows GPIB-like communication with USB devices.
Page 964 USBTMC:VENDORID:DECimal? (Query Only) This query returns the vendor ID number as a decimal. The decimal vendor ID for Tektronix instruments is 1689. USBTMC stands for USB Test & Measurement Class, a protocol that allows GPIB-like communication with USB devices. Group...
Page 965 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order VERBose This command speciﬁes the Verbose state that controls the length of keywords on query responses. Keywords can be both headers and arguments. NOTE. This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands (those starting with an asterisk). This command does affect the verbose state of both the USBTMC and VXI-11 interfaces.
Page 966 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Video Picture Syntax VIDPic:AUTOContrast {0|1|OFF|ON} VIDPic:AUTOContrast? Arguments turns on the auto contrast state for the video picture feature. turns it off. Examples turns on the auto contrast state for the video picture feature. VIDP:AUTOC ON VIDPic:AUTOContrast:UPDATERate Sets (or queries) the number of frames between automatic contrast updates.
Page 967 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Video Picture Syntax VIDPic:BRIGHTNess <NR1> VIDPic:BRIGHTNess? Arguments Integer that represents the video picture brightness level as an integer percentage, in the range of 0 to 100. Examples sets the video picture brightness level to 49 percent. VIDP:BRIGHTN 49 VIDPic:CONTRast Sets (or queries) the video picture contrast level as an integer percentage.
Page 968 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax VIDPic:DISplay {0|1|OFF|ON} VIDPic:DISplay? Arguments turns on the video picture display feature. turns it off. Examples turns on the video picture display feature. VIDP:DIS ON VIDPic:FRAMETYPe Sets (or queries) the video picture frame type (ODD, EVEN or INTERLAced). Interlaced frames combine successive odd and even frames by displaying alternating lines from each.
Page 969 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Video Picture Syntax VIDPic:LOCation:HEIght <NR1> VIDPic:LOCation:HEIght? Arguments Integer that represents the video picture height, in rows. This value must be >= 1. The range is from 1 - 400. Examples sets the video picture height to 253 rows. VIDP:LOC:HEI 253 VIDPic:LOCation:OFFSet Sets (or queries) the video picture line-to-line offset.
Page 970 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Video Picture Syntax VIDPic:LOCation:STARt:LINE <NR1> VIDPic:LOCation:STARt:LINE? Arguments Integer that represents the video picture starting line number, in the range of 0 to 1023. The default is 17. Examples sets the video picture starting line number to 348. VIDPIC:STAR:LINE 348 VIDPic:LOCation:STARt:PIXel Sets (or queries) the video picture starting pixel in each line...
Page 971 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions MDO3000 series. Requires option SA3 or SA6 for the MDO4000C series. Requires the DPO4VID application module for use with MSO/DPO4000B, MDO4000 and MDO4000B models. Group Video Picture Syntax VIDPic:LOCation:WIDth <NR1> VIDPic:LOCation:WIDth? Arguments Integer that represents the video picture width, in columns. This value must be >= 1.
Page 972 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions MDO3000 series. Requires option SA3 or SA6 for the MDO4000C series. Requires the DPO4VID application module for use with MSO/DPO4000B, MDO4000 and MDO4000B models. Group Video Picture Syntax VIDPic:LOCation:Y <NR1> VIDPic:LOCation:Y? Arguments Integer that represents the video picture Y origin location, in rows, where row 0 is the top most edge of the display.
Page 973 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions MDO3000 series. Requires option SA3 or SA6 for the MDO4000C series. Requires the DPO4VID application module for use with MSO/DPO4000B, MDO4000 and MDO4000B models. Group Video Picture Syntax VIDPic:STANdard {NTSC|PAL} VIDPic:STANdard? Arguments sets the video picture standard to NTSC (National Television Systems NTSC Committee).
Page 974 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order to sending both , with the additional provision that the WFMOutpre? CURVe? response to is guaranteed to provide a synchronized preamble and WAVFrm? curve. The source waveform, as speciﬁed by must be active or DATA:SOURCE, the query will not return any data and will generate an error event.
Page 975 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax WFMInpre? Related Commands WFMOutpre? Examples might return the waveform formatting as WFMINPRE? :WFMINPRE:BIT_NR 8;BN_FMT RI;BYT_NR 1; BYT_OR MSB;ENCDG BIN;NR_PT 500;PT_FMT Y; PT_OFF 0;XINCR 2.0000E-6;XZERO 1.7536E-6; XUNIT "s";YMULT 1.0000E-3;YOFF 0.0000; YZERO 0.0000;YUNIT "V" WFMInpre:BIT_Nr This command speciﬁes the number of bits per data point in the waveform data to be sent to the oscilloscope using the command.
Page 976 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMInpre:BN_Fmt This command speciﬁes the format of the data for outgoing waveforms when is set to . The format can either be RI (signed integer), WFMInpre:ENCdg BINary RP (positive integer) or FP (ﬂoating point). (See page 2-95, Waveform Transfer Command Group.) Group Waveform Transfer Syntax...
Page 977 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax WFMInpre:BYT_Nr <NR1> WFMInpre:BYT_Nr? Related Commands WFMInpre:BIT_Nr Arguments is the number of bytes per data point. The number of bytes can be 1 or 2 <NR1> for Analog, Math or the digital channels D0 – D15. It can be 4 or 8 for DIGital collection data.
Page 978 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return indicating that the WFMINPRE:BYT_OR? :WFMINPRE:BYT_OR LSB least signiﬁcant incoming data byte will be expected ﬁrst. CURVe WFMInpre:CENTERFREQuency This command speciﬁes the center frequency of the incoming RF trace (waveform), in hertz. The center frequency is a precise frequency at the center of the frequency domain display.
Page 979 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMInpre:WFMTYPe Related Commands Arguments speciﬁes to treat the information to be transferred as integer values. TIMe speciﬁes to treat the information to be transferred as ﬂoating point FREQuency values. Examples speciﬁes to treat the information to be WFMInpre:DOMain FREQuency transferred from a PC to a reference location as ﬂoating point values.
Page 980 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMInpre:NR_Pt This command speciﬁes the number of data points that are in the incoming waveform record to be sent to the oscilloscope using the command. CURVe (See page 2-95, Waveform Transfer Command Group.) Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMInpre:NR_Pt <NR1>...
Page 981 WFMInpre:PT_Off The set form of this command is ignored. The query form always returns a 0. (This command is listed for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes.) (See page 2-95, Waveform Transfer Command Group.) Group...
Page 982 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMInpre:REFLevel This command speciﬁes the Reference Level of the incoming waveform. This command applies only to frequency domain waveforms. The Reference Level is adjustable from 10 pico Watts (–140dBm) to 1 Watt (+30dBm). Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only. Group Waveform Transfer Syntax...
Page 983 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the span to 500 MHz. WFMinpre:SPAN 500.0E+6 might return 500.0E+6, indicating that the span has been set WFMinpre:SPAN? to 500 MHz. WFMInpre:WFMTYPe This command speciﬁes the type of waveform that is being transferred to the oscilloscope for storage in one of the REF1 - REF4 memory locations.
Page 984 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples speciﬁes the type of the incoming waveform as a WFMInpre:WFMTYPe RF_FD frequency domain trace (to be displayed on the frequency domain window). might return , indicating that the incoming WFMInpre:WFMTYPe? ANALOG waveform type is either Channel 1–4 or Math (to be displayed on the time domain window).
Page 985 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMInpre:XUNit <QString> WFMInpre:XUNit? Related Commands WFMOutpre:XUNit? Arguments contains the characters that represent the horizontal units for the <QString> incoming waveform. Examples speciﬁes that the horizontal units for the incoming WFMINPRE:XUNIT "HZ" waveform are hertz.
Page 986 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples , which indicates the trigger occurred 5.7 µs before the WFMINPRE:XZERO 5.7E-6 ﬁrst sample in the waveform. might return indicating WFMINPRE:XZERO? :WFMINPRE:XZEro –7.5000E-6 that the trigger occurs 7.5 µs after the ﬁrst sample in the waveform. WFMInpre:YMUlt This command speciﬁes the vertical scale multiplying factor to be used to convert the incoming data point values being sent to the oscilloscope, from digitizing...
Page 987 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes that (if is "V" WFMINPRE:YMULT 20E-3 WFMInpre:YUNit is 1), the vertical scale is 20 mV/digitizing level WFMInpre:BYT_Nr (500 mV/div). WFMInpre:YOFf This command speciﬁes the vertical position of the destination reference waveform in digitizing levels. There are 25 digitizing levels per vertical division for 1-byte data, and 6400 digitizing levels per vertical division for 2-byte data.
Page 988 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return indicating the vertical WFMINPRE:YOFF? :WFMINPRE:YOFF 25 position of the incoming waveform is 25 digitizing levels. WFMInpre:YUNit This command speciﬁes the vertical units of data points in the incoming waveform record sent to the oscilloscope using the command.
Page 989 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMInpre:YUNit command (YUNit units). It uses the following formula (where dl means digitizing levels; curve_in_dl is a data point value in the data): CURVe Value in YUNit units = ((curve_in_dl - YOFf) * YMUlt) + YZEro NOTE.
Page 990 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. For command sequence examples, see Appendix D. (See page D-1, Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples.) Example 1: Analog Waveform (channel 1 - 4) Example 2: Digital Waveform (channel DO-D15) Example 3: The Digital Collection with 4 Bytes Per Point with MagniVu Off Example 4: The Digital Collection with 8 Bytes Per Point with MagniVu Off Example 5: The Digital Collection with 4 Bytes Per Point with MagniVu On Example 6: The Digital Collection with 8 Bytes Per Point with MagniVu On...
Page 991 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr <NR1> WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr? Related Commands DATa:SOUrce, DATa:WIDth, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr Arguments is the number of bits per data point and can be 8, 16, 32 or 64. <NR1> Examples sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16 for WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 16 outgoing waveforms.
Page 992 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples speciﬁes that outgoing waveform data will be in positive WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT RP integer format. might return indicating that WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT? :WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT RI the outgoing waveform data is currently in signed integer format. WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr This command speciﬁes the data width for the outgoing waveform speciﬁed by the DATa:SOUrce command.
Page 993 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre:BYT_Or This command speciﬁes which byte of outgoing binary waveform data is transmitted ﬁrst (the byte order). The byte order can either be MSB (most signiﬁcant byte ﬁrst) or LSB (least signiﬁcant byte ﬁrst, also known as IBM format).
Page 994 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency? Examples might return 1.0E+9, indicating a center WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency? frequency of 1 GHz. WFMOutpre:DOMain? (Query Only) This query returns the domain of the outgoing waveform — either TIMe or FREQuency. If the domain is TIMe, it indicates that the data is to be treated as integer information.
Page 995 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre:BYT_Or, WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt Arguments speciﬁes that the outgoing data is to be in ASCII format. Waveforms ASCii will be sent as numbers. <NR1> speciﬁes that outgoing data is to be in a binary format whose further BINary speciﬁcation is determined by WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt...
Page 996 DATA:SOUrce displayed. If the waveform is not displayed, the query form generates an error. (It is provided for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes). (See page 2-95, Waveform Transfer Command Group.) (See page D-1, Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples.)
Page 997 WFMOUTPRE:PT_OFF 0 WFMOutpre:PT_ORder? (Query Only) This query returns the point ordering, which is always linear (included for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes). (See page 2-95, Waveform Transfer Command Group.) (See page D-1, Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples.) Group...
Page 998 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return 1.0000E-3, indicating a Reference Level WFMOutpre:REFLevel? of 1 mW. WFMOutpre:SPAN? (Query Only) This query returns the frequency span of the outgoing waveform. For non-MDO models, this query always returns 0.0. The span is the range of frequencies you can observe around the center frequency. Conditions MDO3000, MDO4000/B, or MDO4000C models with option SA3 or SA6 only.
Page 999: Table 2-58: Waveform Sufﬁxes
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2-58: Waveform Sufﬁxes Field Description Examples Source The source identiﬁcation string as it appears in “CH1–4” the front-panel scale factor readouts. “Math1 “Ref1–4" Coupling A string describing the vertical coupling of the “AC coupling” waveform (the Source1 waveform in the case of “DC couplng”...
Page 1000 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order The type of waveform that is being transferred in turn determines which window will display it on the instrument screen: (the time domain window or frequency domain window). Both the analog and RF-TD arguments specify the time domain window;...
Page 1001 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre:XUNit? (Query Only) This query indicates the horizontal units of the x-axis of the waveform record transferred using the query. Typically, this value is "s" when the CURVe? waveform source is displayed in the time domain, and "Hz" when the waveform source is displayed in the frequency domain.
Page 1002 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return indicating WFMOUTPRE:XZERO? :WFMOUTPRE:XZERO 5.6300E-9 that the trigger occurred 5.63 ns before the ﬁrst sample in the waveform record. WFMOutpre:YMUlt? (Query Only) This query returns the vertical scale multiplying factor used to convert the waveform data point values in the outgoing waveform record from digitizing levels to the YUNit units.
Page 1003 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMOutpre:YOFf? Related Commands DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr Examples might return indicating WFMOUTPRE:YOFF? :WFMOUTPRE:YOFF -50.0000E+0 that the position indicator for the waveform was 50 digitizing levels (2 divisions) below center screen (for 8-bit waveform data). WFMOutpre:YUNit? (Query Only) This query returns the units of data points in the outgoing waveform record transferred using the...

This manual is also suitable for:

Mdo4000c series Mdo3000 series Mdo4024c Mdo4054c Mdo4034c Mdo4104 ... Show all